Ensoniq ks 32 user manual english sortof

WEIGHTED ACTION MIDI STUDIO

AnualV ersion. 1 0

Page 2

KS-32 Manual:

Written, designedand illustrated by: Tom Tracy, Jim Boggia, Suzanne Kuldell,

Bill McCutcheon, Jon O. Sr. and Bill Whipple

Into German by: Arnd Kaiser

All information provided without guarantee

Page 3

Contents KS-32 user guide

Contents

Initiation

Willkommen!.............................................................................................i - 1The synthesizer ................................................ ......................................... i - 1The sequencer ................................................ ........................................... i - 2MIDI master keyboard ............................................... ................................ i - 2Storage ................................................. .............................................. i - 2The instruction manual ................................................ .......................... i - 3Power Ups ................................................. ............................................... i - 3Power supply - grounding ............................................... ........................ i - 3Voltage conditions ................................................. ............................. i - 3Chill Guidelines ................................................ .............................. i - 4The KS-32 in a hi-fi system ......................................... ...................... i - 5Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connection ...................................... i - 5Low Battery Voltage - When the battery must be replaced ...... i - 5Re-initialization of the KS-32 ........................................... .......................... i - 6When re-initialized should be ............................................ ................ i - 6

Part 1 - Tutorial

Table of Contents - 1

Anschluß...................................................................................................1 - 1Power Ups ................................................. .............................................. 1-2To select a program ............................................... ................................ 1-2Sound storage areas ................................................ ........................... 1-3

Select a basic sound editing on ........................... 1-6Select a voice for editing on ........................................ 1-6Selecting a waveform ............................................... .......... 1-6

Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 1-7Save a new sound .............................................. ................... 1-8Discard changes in sound ................................................ ............... 1-9Get Out ................................................. ............................................... 1-9Copy of a sound at a different location ....................... 1 - 10Sequencer Basics ............................................... ............................ 1 - 10Record Other Tracks ............................................... ...................... 1-13Reworking of tracks ............................................... ..................: 1 - 14Master MIDI controller functions ........................................... .......... 1 - 15The pattern presets .............................................. ...................................: 1 - 16Create splits and layers ............................................. .................: 1 - 16

Part 2 - Overview

Ports on the back .............................................. ..................... 2 - 2MIDI Thru ............................................... ....................................... 2 - 2MIDI Out ............................................... ......................................... 2 - 2MIDI In ............................................... ............................................ 2 - 2Foot switch input ............................................. .............................. 2 - 2Memory card slot ............................................. ....................... 2 - 3Pedal / CV ............................................... .......................................... 2 - 3Right / Mono output ............................................. ............................ 2 - 3Left / Mono output ............................................. .............................. 2 - 3

Page 4

KS-32 user guide Contents

Headphones ................................................. ................................................. 2 - 4Performance controllers ............................................... ............................. 2-4The front panel - Communication with the KS-32 ........................ 2-5

The Select Sound button ............................................ ....................... 2 - 6The edit sound button ............................................ .......................... 2 - 6The BankSet button .............................................. ............................. 2 - 6The Bank buttons .............................................. ................................ 2 - 7The screen buttons .............................................. .............................. 2 - 7The Select Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ......... 2 - 8The Edit Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 8The Edit track button ............................................ ........................... 2 - 8The track buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 8The drive buttons .............................................. ......................... 2 - 9The Replace-track sound button .......................................... ........... 2 - 9The make-default preset button .......................................... ............. 2 - 9The System • MIDI button ............................................ ...................... 2 - 9

The MIDI connections .............................................. ........................... 2-10Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectors .......................... 2-10MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instruments ...................... 2 - 11MIDI Track Configuration ............................................. ........................ 2 - 11Parametric programming ................................................ .............. 2 - 12Change a parameter ............................................... ..................... 2 - 13About this Guide ............................................... ............................... 2 - 14KS-32 Accessories .............................................. .......................................... 2-15

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

Master Tune ............................................... ............................................... 3 - 2Global Bend ............................................... ............................................... 3 - 2Touch ........................................................................................................3 - 2FtswL - Foot Switch Left ........................................... ............................ 3-7Pedal..........................................................................................................3 - 8MIDI parameters ............................................... ......................................... 3-9Base Channel ............................................... ............................................. 3-9Based channel MIDI Status ............................................. ............................. 3-10Based channel Afterouch type ............................................. ......................... 3-10MIDI Mode - MIDI In Fashion ......................................... ..................... 3-11MONO mode ............................................... ........................................... 3-12Global controller in MONO mode ........................................... .......... 3-12XCtrl - Remote Controller ............................................. ........................ 3-12Controllers...............................................................................................3 - 13ENSONIQ Bank's Special "tax" -Programmwechselbefehle ........ 3-14Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 3-14Excl System - System Exclusive messages ........................................ 3 - 15


Excl System - System Exclusive messages ........................................ 3 - 15MIDI Trk Name ............................................. ......................................... 3 - 16MIDI-Loop..............................................................................................3 - 16

Part 4 - Effects

To understand the KS-32 effects ........................................... .............. 4 - 1Sound effects ............................................... ............................................ 4 - 2Preset / Sequence / Song Effects ........................................... ....................... 4 - 2The programming of the effects .............................................. ................ 4 - 2The effects loops ................................................ ......................................... 4 - 3Mixture of effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 4Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 5Sounds and presets ............................................... ..................................... 4 - 5

Page 5



When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip? ........................... 4 - 5Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset Mode ............ 4 - 6Modulation effect ................................................ .................................... 4 - 6Ramps.......................................................................................................4 - 8Controller assignment of effects ............................................... ............... 4-9Effect parameters ............................................... ....................................... 4-9

CONCERT REVERB ................................................ ................... 4 - 108-VOICE.CHORUS ............................................. ......................... 4-11PHASE SHIFTER ................................................ ........................ 4-12CHORUS & REVERB ............................................... .................. 4 - 13Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2 ........................................... ............. 4 - 13PHASER + REVERB ............................................... ...................... 4-14ROTORY SPKR + VERB .............................................. ................ 4 - 16DIST + CHORUS + VERB ............................................. ................. 4-17CMPRSS + DIST + VERB ............................................. .................. 4-18

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

What is a sound? .................................................. ................................. 5 - 1Voices and consistency ............................................... ......................... 5 - 1Compare - About the Compare button / LED ......................................... .... 5-2The Edit-Buffer.........................................................................................5 - 2How to save new sounds ............................................. .................. 5 - 3How to copy sounds .............................................. ............................ 5 - 4

Part 6 - Standard Sound Programming

KS-32 standard sound structure .......................................... ..................... 6 - 2Modulators ................................................. ............................................ 6 - 3

About modulation ................................................ ............................. 6 - 3Selecting a modulator ............................................... ................ 6 - 3Modulation Amount - yes or no modulation ............................. 6 - 4Modulation sources ................................................. ....................... 6 - 4

The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 6 - 8Wave-Bank...............................................................................................6 - 8

Select Voice / Voice-status ............................................. ................ 6 - 9Wave-class ............................................... .................................... 6 - 10Individual Waves ............................................... ........................... 6-12Delay time ............................................... ...................................... 6-13Home Index ............................................... ..................................... 6-13Loop Length ............................................... .................................. 6 - 14Voice Restrike Decay Time ........................................... .............. 6 - 14Change sound mode ............................................. ....................... 6 - 14

Pitch Bank ............................................... ............................................... 6 - 15Oct.................................................................................................6 - 15Env1 ................................................. ............................................. 6 - 15Mod Source ............................................... ................................... 6-16Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................ 6-16Glide ................................................. ............................................ 6-16

ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelope ............. 6-18Levl - Level ............................................... ................................. 6-19Time ................................................. ............................................. 6-20Levv - Dynamic Level Control .......................................... 6-21Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2) ......................................... ............. 6-22MODE (AMP) - Parts trigger .......................................... ..6 - 22KeyboardTrk - keyboard control .............................................. 6 - 23Select Defaults ............................................... ............................... 6-24



The LFO Bank .............................................. ........................................... 6-25LFO speed ............................................... ..................................... 6-25Noise-rate ............................................... ...................................... 6-25Level - LFO level ............................................. ......................... 6-26Wave ................................................. ............................................. 6-26

The filter bank .............................................. ......................................... 6-28Filter1 - Filter-1 mode ........................................... ..................... 6-28Filter configurations ............................................... .................... 6-29FC1 Cutoff - Filter-1 cutoff frequency ....................................... 6 - 30FC1 Keyboard ................................................ ............................... 6-30Mod Source ............................................... .................................... 6-30FC2 Cutoff - Filter-2 cutoff frequency ....................................... 6 - 31FC2 Keyboard ................................................ ............................... 6-31

The Env2 and amp benches ............................................ .......................... 6-31The output Bank .............................................. ....................................... 6-32

Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ........... 6-32Mod Source - Volume modulator .......................................... 6 - 32KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone) ................ 6-33Output bus ............................................... ..................................... 6-33Pan - Pan position ............................................... ................. 6-34

Part 7 - drum sound programming

The KS-32 drum sound construction ......................................... ..................... 7 - 1Selecting the drum sound Edit ........................................... ....................... 7 - 1The Sound Edit mode ............................................ ................................... 7 - 2The Wave Bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 2

Current note number .............................................. ................... 7 - 2Key-Range - Low-Key / high-key ....................................... ......... 7 - 3How to "gaps" in the Key Map opens ..................................... 7 - 3Wave-class ............................................... ....................................... 7 - 4Wave-name ............................................... ...................................... 7 - 5Direction ................................................. ......................................... 7 - 5Clear-key-mapped ............................................. ................................... 7 - 5Change sound mode ............................................. .......................... 7 - 6

The Pitch-Bank..........................................................................................7 - 6Oct ................................................. .................................................. 7 - 6Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................... 7 - 7

The filter bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 7Fc cutoff - filter cutoff frequency .......................................... ..... 7 - 7Gate time ............................................... ......................................... 7 - 8Levv - Velocity-level control ........................................... ......... 7 - 8Voice stealing ............................................... .............................. 7 - 8

The output Bank .............................................. ......................................... 7-9Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ............. 7-9Output bus ............................................... ....................................... 7-9

Utilization of the General MIDI drum maps ......................................... .7 - 10Use of performance presets ............................................. ................ 7-11

Page 7


Part 8 - Presets

About Presets..............................................................................................8 - 1Selecting presets ............................................... ............................... 8 - 1Preset mode and Sequencer Mode ........................................... ............... 8 - 1About tracks ................................................ .............................................. 8 - 2Layers of sounds through the track buttons .......................................... ... 8 - 3The Replace-track sound button .......................................... .................... 8 - 3Exchange of sounds in a track ............................................ ........ 8 - 3Insert a Sound with effect .......................................... 8 - 4

From the sound mode ............................................. ....................... 8 - 4From the Sequence / Preset Edit mode ......................................... ... 8 - 4From the Select-Sequence / Preset Mode ......................................... 8 - 4


Effects and Presets ............................................... .................................... 8-5About track performance parameter ............................................ ........... 8-6Layer-Lock ............................................... ................................................ 8 - 6The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) Functions ............................ 8 - 7Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset) ....................................... ........... 8 - 7In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset)The Edit Track screens ............................................ .............................. 8 - 10Vol - Volume ............................................... ........................................ 8 - 10Pan - Panorama ............................................... ..................................... 8 - 10Output.....................................................................................................8 - 10Key-Range..............................................................................................8 - 11Transpose................................................................................................8 - 11Chan - MIDI Channel ............................................. ............................. 8-12Prog - MIDI program number ............................................ ............ 8-12Program change in the KS-32 ............................................. ..................... 8-13ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change messages ........ 8-13Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 8-13MIDI-Status............................................................................................8 - 14Pressure - Aftertouch ............................................... ............................ 8 - 14Sustain pedal ............................................... ........................................... 8-15Timbre ....................................................................................................8 - 15Release....................................................................................................8 - 16

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

Introduction - What you need to know about presets ................................. 9-1Digital sequencer ................................................ ................................... 9 - 2What is a Sequence? .................................................. ............................ 9 - 3What's that sound? .................................................. ................................... 9 - 3The sequencer "drive functions" ............................................. ........ 9-4The sequencer status .............................................. ................................. 9-5Sequencer and Song benches ............................................. ......................... 9-5

Selecting a sequence / a song ............................................ .... 9-6Playing a sequence / a song ............................................ 9-6

How to create a new sequence ............................................ .............. 9-7How to create a new songHow to delete the entire sequencer memory ................................. 9-8Recording a sequence ............................................... ........................... 9 - 9"Punch In" in a track ........................................... ............................... 9-11Play an active sequence / try Sounds .................... 9-12Recording MIDI tracks ............................................. ..................... 9-12Track volume functions - mixing, mute, solo ......... 9-13The Song Mode .............................................. ........................................ 9-15

Effect - switching in Song mode ........................................... 9-15

Page 8


Song Tracks ............................................... .................................... 9-17Sequence control of tracks in the Song Mode ........................... 9-18Blending sequence and song tracks in Song Mode ........ 9-19Notes to the mixdown mode ............................................. 9-20

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

The locate Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10 - 2Sequence Locate ............................................... ............................ 10 - 2Song Locate ............................................... .................................... 10-3Seq-Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch function .............. 10-4Editing the times in the Song mode ........................................... ... 10-5Adjustment of the positions in real-time ........................................... 10 - 5Seq-Punch-Out ............................................. ................................. 10-6Auto Punch ............................................... ..................................... 10-6Tap Tempo ............................................... ..................................... 10-6Tempo - song tempo offset ........................................... ........ 10-6

The Control Bank .............................................. ...................................... 10-7Loop...............................................................................................10 - 7Step Entry ............................................... ....................................... 10-7Record - The record mode ............................................ .......... 10-10Auto Punch ............................................... ................................... 10-10Song uses Effect from .............................................. ................... 10-10Song Edit Tracks Displayed ........................................... ............ 10 - 11Save Changes mode ............................................. ...................... 10-12About the "Save Changes?" - Screen ......................................... .... 10-12Total Sequencer Free memory (display only) ............................ 10 - 13Reinitialize sequencer ............................................... .................. 10-14

The Click Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10-14Click ................................................. ........................................... 10-14Click-volume ............................................... ............................... 10-14Tempo ................................................. ......................................... 10-15

The Song Bank - Song Edit functions ........................................ .... 10-16


Create-song ............................................... .................................. 10-16Copy song ............................................... .................................... 10-17Erase Song / Preset ............................................. ........................... 10-17Song information ............................................... ......................... 10 - 18Rename Song / Preset ............................................. ...................... 10 - 18Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10 - 19Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step Editor .............. 10 - 20Editing Song steps - The Song step editor ........... 10-22

The Seq Commands Bank ............................................ ......................... 10-24Create-Sequence / Preset ............................................. .................. 10-24Copy Sequence ............................................... ............................. 10-25Erase Sequence / Preset ............................................. .................... 10-26Sequence information ............................................... .................. 10-26Rename Sequence / Preset ............................................. ............... 10-27Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10-27Append Sequence ............................................... ......................... 10-28Change Length - inserting and deleting bars ............. 10-29

The track Commands Bank ............................................ ..................... 10-31Determination of the editing area - Track-range function .... 10-31Event Edit Track ............................................. ............................ 10 - 32Copy Track ............................................... ................................... 10-36Erase Track ............................................... .................................. 10-37Merge Track ............................................... ................................. 10-37Transpose Track ............................................... ........................... 10-38Shift Track ............................................... .................................... 10-39

Page 9


Scale Track ............................................... .................................. 10-40Filter Events ............................................... ................................ 10-41

Quantize-Track.....................................................................................10 - 42Track Mute status ............................................. ................................... 10-43

Part 11 - Storage

Memory card storage ............................................. ....................... 11-1Insert the battery in a RAM card .................................... 11-1Memory card configurations ............................................. .... 11-2Formatting an empty card .............................................. ........ 11-2Save sounds on memory card ..................................... 11-3Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 4Storing sequence data on memory card ..................... 11-5About the sequencer memory ............................................. .......... 11-5Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 6

MIDI SYS-EX-storage ........................................... ....................... 11-7Sending MIDI Sys Ex data from the KS-32 .............................. 11-7Send one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex ................ 11-7Send sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex ......................... 11-8Receive MIDI SysEx data ......................................... ...... 11-9

Part 12 - Examples of application

Using the KS-32 with drum machines ......................................... ..... 12-1Song Position Pointer ............................................. ............................... 12-2MIDI Song Select ............................................. ..................................... 12-2The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controller ........................................ ..... 12-3Creating your own drum kits ............................................ ............. 12-4

Editing Voices ............................................... ...................... 12-5Setting the keys scope ............................................... ........ 12-6Save the edited drum kits ......................................... 12-7

Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sources .12 - 8MIDI connectors ............................................... ........................... 12-8Selection of Multi-mode ............................................. ............ 12-8MIDI mode and channel - receiving instruments ...................... 12-9MIDI track configuration .............................................. ............. 12-9

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation

Parameters - Reference lists


Page 10Page 11

KS-32 user guide Initiation

i - 1

Initiation

Willkommen!............................................................................................i - 1The synthesizer ................................................ ........................................ i - 1The sequencer ................................................ .......................................... i - 2MIDI master keyboard ............................................... ............................... i - 2Storage ................................................. .............................................i - 2The instruction manual ............................................... . ......................... i - 3Power Ups ................................................ . .............................................. i - 3Power supply - grounding .............................................. . ....................... i - 3Voltage conditions ................................................ . ............................ i - 3Chill Guidelines ................................................ ............................. i - 4The KS-32 in a hi-fi system ........................................ . ..................... i - 5Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connection ..................................... i - 5Low Battery Voltage - When the battery BE REPLACED WITH ..... i - 5Re-initialization of the KS-32 .......................................... . ......................... i - 6When re-initialized shoulderstand be ............................................ ............... i - 6

Welcome!Congratulations and thank you for choosing the ENSONIQKS-32 havebeen DECIDED. The KS-32 Keyboard Combines a greatsounding synthesizer with a fantastic recordable WeightedKeyboard, making it Both as a synthesizer, as well asMaster keyboard is Suitable. The KS-32 has a channel aftertouch,24-bit FX processor, a powerful 16-track sequencer withMixdown functions and 32 voices. With 32 votes IncreasesMaximum number of simultaneous notes, dass die flexibility inLayers of sounds and preset creation Increases, chord voicingsAllows improved and much more detail in the sequencer. All thistaken together constitutes the ENSONIQ KS-32 Weighted Action MIDIStudio.

The synthesizerThe synthesizer section of the KS-32 contains 180 great sounds, 100Sounds in ROM (Read Only Memory) with 80 additional memoriesin the internal RAM (Random Access Memory). The 80 RAM locations(The internal memory) can thus be used to sounds fromvarious RAM or ROM cards together, each 160can save more sounds and the number of playable SimultaneouslyIncrease sounds to an impressive 340th Each KS-32 sound besteht of threeindependent voices (voices) with 168 sampled acoustic andsynthetic waveforms, Including ENSONIQ s uniqueTrans Waves ™, to immense harmonious diversity and dynamicsallow.

Page 12

Initiation KS-32 user guide

The amendment did to broad palette of tone colors is a built-indigital multi-effects device did each KS-32 sound spatial width and

i - 2

Density adds. Different reverb, chorus, flanging, delay,Distortion and even Roto-speaker programs are dynamic overmanyInfluenced parameter.

The SequencerThe 16 track sequencer Combines ease of programming withextensive editing capabilities gene rally only place inSoftware can be found sequencers. Up to 8,500 notesbe recorded (expandable to 58,000 notes with the additionalSQX 70 extension) at a resolution of 96 beats per quarterNote for precise timing. It stores up to 70 sequences complementary to 30Songs can be connected. Are, after recording tracksPost-processing functions: such as quantization, time shift andSingle-step editing available with your music in Which aCan make way did you would have thought in this kind of impossible.And always with the option of each work and change with theto compare the old version before you choose the better optiondecide. The Auto Punch function Allows accurate settingPoints for once out and out, just like in professionalRecording studios.

Each track in the sequencer can OPTIONALLY internal sounds of the KS-32and / or trigger sounds from external audio sources, each with its ownMIDI channel, program number, MIDI Status and adjustable volume.

MIDI master keyboardThe track sequencer buttons so enable the combinationof up to 16 internal or external (MIDI) sounds so did you ownCan create sound Combinations or splits, what the performanceOptions greatly Increased. This can track Combinationsbe saved as presets performance and Quickly retrieve. Through theData heads of the sequences did containment eight internal / external soundshold, you can save 70 presets performance. There are soanother 30 special song data heads with Which even 16 internal / externalCan save MIDI tracks, giving a total of 100 presets.

With this feature, the KS-32 Keyboard as a master keyboard for acomplete MIDI system can be used. The KS-32 even has aWhich special key with default presets (presets pattern) createblank, In Which then Layers and Splits are already ready prepared.

Page 13


StorageThe KS-32 uses memory cards in credit card format to storeof a sounds and sequences. Sounds and sequence data canSo has MIDI system exclusive data to any MIDI deviceare trans mitted, Which is Suitable for storage of data examined.

The instruction manualThis guide is your key to understanding the full capabilitiesthe KS-32. At this point, They Are Perhaps a little unsure of whatAs for the handling of your new instrument. The rest of this parta brief description of the most important security and AssemblyMeasures. Then follows part 1 tutorial , quick startup (building,Connecting and shut-down) for the ENSONIQ KS-32.

If you tried all the sounds and on impression of the bandwidthgot this synthesizer, and are willing to go into the matterenter, take the time to the rest of the instructions with the

i - 3

Share on sound programming, sequencing and storage practices toread. You will receive valuable support and tips. Your learning processthe new KS-32 will greatly accelerated and facilitated.Again, Thank you and have fun with the new KS-32.

Enjoy the music!

Page 14


Power UpsPlug the power cord into the socket provided on theBack of the KS-32, next to the power switch. The other endbelongs to a grounded wall outlet (the correct voltage is atLabel with the serial number on the back). Switch the KS32, making the display lights up surethat. If not,recheck all connections.

Power supply - groundingLike many modern electronic devices, Including your KS-32 has a three-wireTo Ensure power cord with a grounding for safe operation.There are other products using only two-wire power cords did not doHave grounding. Make sure all your devices with grounded didPower cables are fitted. This extension cords and thus Applies toDistribution boxes. Ideally you connect all devices of your systemthe same circuit on. This way, you avoid ground loops.

Voltage conditionsLike any computer stops responding and the KS-32 sensitive to voltageacute and waste. Lightning strikes, power outages or surges inNetwork can disrupt your internal memory and in someCases May even damage the hardware. Here are a few tips on how tocan protect Themselves from seeking events:

• A Überspannunsschutz: This inexpensive solution PreventsSurges in general. There are so distribution with built-inSurge protection, Which are slightly more expensive than Conventional manifold.A reasonable purchase, then!

• A power stabilizer. This is the best, albeit expensive solution forVoltage problems. In addition to protection against overvoltageEnsures a network stabilizer so well protected fromVoltage dips. If the KS-32, oft under difficultOperate current conditions, you shoulderstand purchase essential in

i - 4

Draw consideration.

Chill GuidelinesInside the KS-32 are Numerous computerized,electronic circuits with strong temperature fluctuationsCould be damaged. If the KS-32 after a long stay inextreme cold is returned in a heated room, forms in theDevice moisture by condensation (as a glasses fog). Shallthe device turned on, it can cause short circuits. Extremehigh temparatures impacting Both circuits as well as the housing.On this background, you shoulderstand follow thesis guidelines strictlynote:

Page 15


i - 5

• Let the KS-32 a long time without temparatures below 10 ° Cor about 38 ° C.

• When using the KS-32 after traveling back in enclosed spacesbring the device can be at least about 20 minutes toTo achieve Raumtemparatur. In extreme Außentemparaturen (under10 ° C or above 38 ° C) wait at least one hour before theSwitch on the device.

• Set the KS-32 is not direct sunlight in a vehiclement from.

The KS-32 on a hi-fi systemIf you want to operate your KS-32 on your stereo, caution isCommanded. A stereo system is good for playing CDs,Records or cassettes Suitable - the dynamic range of synthesis mediais limited and your speakers are not strong Refer toExposed level or frequency hopping. But if the dynamic rangeis a CD higher than that of a record, so a CD is even moreharmless Compared to the uncompressed unlimitedOutput power of a professional keyboards. Search Keyboardscan damage your speakers as well. If your KS-32so be sure to want to run on the stereo system, goYour boxes to love only small volumes.

Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connectionJust as the individual components of a system always beforePower stage, you shoulderstand sending in the MIDI connectionSwitch on the device always before receiving devices. This will avoidunwanted MIDI information when switching from someSent devices. This can lead to conflict or crashes.If did sometimes happens, turn the receiving device just yetoff and then on again.

Low Battery Voltage - When the battery BE REPLACEDThe reason why the KS-32's sounds and sequences not forgeteven if it is turned off, is the factthat its internal RAM"Battery backup" is. The battery is located inside the device andonly to authorized by ENSONIQ Exchanged -Vertragswerkstattbe.

The battery in the KS-32 has a life span of about fiveYears. You want to know When The time comes, the KS-32: because youtelling time. One day you will turn your instrument, andinstead of the usual message saying the Following wants to Appear:

WARNING! Battery lowsee manual.


i - 6

Then press a button to the normal operating modecome. Then make surethat all your sounds and sequencesare secured (memory card or MIDI Sys-Ex) and contact withYour ENSONIQ dealers in connection to the battery as soon ascan be substituiertem possible.

Important: If you receive a "Battery Low" message after aRAM card which Introduced, this report Refers to the battery, the RAM card, not the instrument Itself in See part 11 -Storage , as the card is Replaced battery.

Re-initialization of the KS-32The flexibility and performance of the KS-32 lies in the fact,did he really is a computer-a computer shaped like a keyinstrument, but of despite everything a computer. If you ever have aHave been working computer, you shoulderstand load the operating system andthe Reinitialize after an error message already be familiar with. The re-initialize the KS-32 corresponds to the re-boot a computer.

There are several factors to consider When KS-32 (as with any computer)crash the operating system can lead - voltage transientsdiseases, loss of power, charges etc. As with any computer,can rare, misleading or illogical sequences of commandsCommands confuse the software and illogical resultssen lead. It looks like as if Causing damage, while there areoft only invalid data, the internal memory (RAM) Jumblehave brought`. Sometimes there already helps a one off and on againPower Ups. If did does not help, the device May have to re-initializebe.

When re-initialized Should be:If the KS-32 Itself Behaves Strangely, the display illogicalView or outputs "Unexpected Events" messages Appear in theSequezer and unforeseen things happen in the edit area,try to re-initialize only once before the Service Departmentendeavor.

Warning : If your KS-32 re-initialize, all internal sounds andSequences / presets lost. (The 80 manufacturing RAM sounds become moreAutomatically loaded into the internal memory.) THEREFORE, A CertainCare in the field of data protection to your habit. SaveThey all important data to a memory card or via MIDI Sys-Exbefore the KS-32 re-initialize.

Page 17


To the KS-32 to re-initialize:

• Press the Edit Seq / Presets button. The LED lights up.• While the store Seq button ( Bank 9 ) , press and hold

press the Screen 9 button.• The display shows: "Re-initialize sound & seq RAM?"• Press the Up button. The Up button thus functions as a Yes button to

To answer questions from the display (the Down button Applies accordinglySpeaking as No ).

i - 7

If the trouble persists after re-initialize silent not resolved,You Should contact your ENSONIQ dealer, or the ENSONIQ -Customer service.

Page 18Page 19

KS-32 user guide Part - 1 Tutorial

Part 1 - Tutorial

This part of the manual is to help to plug in, switch andTry the ENSONIQ thought KS-32 keyboard. In this tutorialwe will focus on the most important applications of the KS-32,to familiarize you with some of the most important components and features.Nevertheless, please read Part 2 - Overview and the rest of the operatorating instructions for getting all cooperation as described in this sectionhang and features really understand completely.

Anschluß...................................................................................................1 - 1Power Ups ................................................ . .............................................. 1-2To select a program .............................................. . ................................ 1-2Sound storage areas ............................................... . ........................... 1-3

Select a basic sound editing on ........................... 1-6Select a voice for editing on ........................................ 1-6Selecting a waveform ............................................... .......... 1-6

Selects ............................................... effects. ................................ 1-7Save a new sound .............................................. ................... 1-8Discard changes in sound .............................................. .. ............... 1-9Get Out ................................................ . ............................................... 1 9Copy of a sound at a different location ....................... 1 - 10Sequencer basics ................................................ ........................... 1 - 10Record Other Tracks ............................................... ...................... 1-13Reworking of tracks ............................................... ..................:: 1 - 14Master MIDI controller functions ............................................ .. ....... 1 - 15

1 - 1

The pattern presets ............................................... ..................................: 1 - 16Create splits and layers .............................................. ................: 1 - 16

ConnectionThe Following figure shows how this is to be wired KS-32:

Plz Follow Me

Blender

Amplifier

AudioOutputs

Headerslistener

Networkswitch

Page 20

Part 1 - Tutorial KS-32 user guide

ReinforcementConnect the audio outputs of the KS-32 with the line inputsa mixer or instrument amplifier. To do this, the usual6.3 mm jack cable. When connecting in stereo, you shoulderstand panoramicregulator of the two mixer channels each way to the right and leftturn to take full advantage of the stereo effects of the KS-32. If theKS-32 only want to use Mono, take either the left orthe right output. The other output must then remain free. Therebyswitches the KS-32 automatically to mono operation. It is recommended that theOff Plug the cable, the system or the volume to 0 torotate so that speakers and other components are protected.

Warning : The outputs of the KS-32 have line level and should only lineInputs such as mixers, stereo preamplifier. Keyboard amp, etc.be connected. The connection of the outputs of the KS-32 with aMic-level input, such as a guitar amp or mic inputsa tape deck is not recommended. These devices may be damagedbe.

Warning : The headphone output is optimized for headphones with a medium levelor high impedance (50-600 ohms). If you headphones with lowerUse impedance (8 ohms "Walkman" headphones), turn theVolume control back, because the high output level could yourEars hurt.

Power UpsTurn on your system in the following order:

1) KS-32 (power switch is right on the back).2) Mixer3) Amplifier

Ask. The amp volume to normal room volumeIf you hear nothing, switch the MIDI system (in the reverseOrder) and check all connections.

Selecting a SoundTo select a KS-32 Sound:

• Press Select sound . The KS-32 This change in the SelectSound Mode Select Sound and LED lights. If you onceSelect Sound are fashion, you need to select sound - not even button

1-2

press once to select other sounds.

Illuminates the Select Sound LED, the ten narrow to bank and theten larger screen buttons (0 to 9) used in each case a soundcall, which can then be played.

Page 21


1-3

SelectBank

BankSet

Screen

QuantizeTrackSeqCmdsSongCmdsLFO Env2

MuteTracksTrackCmdsFilter AmpOutput

LocateWave

ControlClickPitchEnv1

EffectsEffects

StoreSeqsStoreSounds

DrumsDrums

VolumePan

ROMA CardCard B

6 871 2 3 54 90

OutputBusKeyRangeTrans-pose PressureGrade TimbreMIDIStatus SustainPedalChannelProgram Release

Bank Set button

Select Sound button

Bank buttons

Screen keys

• Press the Bank 0 button and then Screen 0 . You have the sound# 00 is selected.

• Press the Bank 8 button and then screen 5 . The sound is # 85thTry to select different sounds and play.

Note : You can also use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to use to carryto switch the sounds. The cursor buttons to scroll through the sounds of theeach memory area (eg. B. Internal Sounds) and then change inthe separate drum kits.

Sound storage areasEach KS-32 Sound is a complex structure of up to three singleVoices (voices) for each key, and a programmable effect. Theycan be selected with the KS-32 up to 340 sounds simultaneously:

• Internal (INT) - The 80 sounds in the internal memory of the KS-32 (RAMor random-access memory). The Internal (INT) sounds canboth standard sounds and drum sounds (see Part 6 and 7for details).

• ROM - 80 More sounds permanently stored in ROM (Read OnlyMemory) are stored. As the Internal (INT) sounds are alsoI saved ROM sounds in the KS-32, but in contrast to the INTSounds can not be changed or deleted.

• CARD A and B - 160 additional sounds can be stored on a card(80 sounds in group A and 80 in group B sounds) contained in theCard slot is inserted. As the Internal (INT) group, can alsothe card-sounds-standard or drum sounds to be.

• DRUM MACHINES - The sound banks 8 and 9 containonly drum kits. These drum kits are always available, no matterwhether you are in Internal (INT), ROM or CARD-range. The Drum Kitsthe banks 8 and 9 are permanently stored in ROM and can be neithermodify or delete.

Selecting the Internal ROM and audio card

Internal

0

ROM

1

A Card

2

Card B

3

BankSetBank buttons

Page 22

Part 1 - Tutorial KS-32 user guideThe first four bank buttons are also used to distinguish between internal,

1-4

The first four bank buttons are also used to distinguish between internal,ROM, CARD A and B CARD switch. Always appears in the displayGroup, location and name of the sound itself:

ROM 80

Dynamic Grand

Sound Group Position

Sound Name

There are three methods to switch between the different areas ofswitch:

1) The BankSet and Bank - buttons - You can use any of the sound groupsselected directly by the BankSet - Press and hold buttonand to one of the four first bank - press buttons. The Bank buttonsare labeled accordingly.

2) The BankSet key - By repeatedly pressing the BankSet buttonYou can also turn off sound by the individual groups.

3) The left / right cursor keys - As with the BankSet button canone with the left / right cursor keys to scroll through the SoundGroups switch.

Page 23


Memory Cards (Cards)With memory cards can extend the sound range of the KS-32 andSounds and sequences store. Before sounds or sequences ofcan use a card, you must first of ENSONIQ SCor ISC ROM card, or a MC-32 RAM card into the card slot of theKS-32 plug, always with the label side up. Make sure theCard straight and evenly inserted into the slot.

MC - 32

THE TECHNOLOGY THAT PERFORMS

1-5

Cards can always be inserted or withdrawn (unlessYou are saving some), even when the power is turned on withoutdamaging the device. More about attire in Part 11 - storage.

Page 24


Programming of Sounds

With the ENSONIQ KS-32 Keyboard you can easily sound parameterschange of the sound to your taste or own, newMake sounds. A full treatment of this topic forin Section 6 - Standard sound programming . We want to herefew simple edits deal:

Select a basic sound editing:• Choose a drum sound (for our example bank 8 and screen 0 ).

The display shows:

Drum 80

Big Ol 'Rock Kit

• Before you can edit a sound, you must first KS-32 inbring the sound edit mode. So press the Edit Sound .

The parameters in the Sound Edit mode are ten banks distributed. Each bankcontains a series of screens on which then one or moreAre parameters.

• Press Wave ( Bank 0 key) and 5 screen is displayed.:

Press ENTER to

Change Sound Mode

• Press Enter • Save . You now have a basic sound editing

1-6

generated. The display shows the message "Command Successful!"

Select a Voice for editing:Each sound of the KS-32 can consist of up to three separate voices (votes)exist. We want to edit the first voice:• Press the right cursor is the second voice (it button

selected if it flashes).• Use the down cursor turn off the voice to OFF.• Press the right cursor key to select the third Voice.• Use the down cursor turn off the voice to OFF.

Page 25


• Now use the left cursor button again to the first voice.The display should look like this:

Select Voice: ONE

ON OFF OFF

flashes

Selecting a waveform:• Press Wave ( bank 0) and 1 screen appears in the display.:

Wave = STRING WAVE

STRING ENSEMBLE

flashes

• Select STRING ENSEMBLE on. If the name is not flashing,use the cursor keys or press Screen 1 a second time,to select the waveform.

• Use the Up • Yes and No Down • cursor keys, you can now each of the168 internal waveforms select. With the data entry controlYou can reach here only the waveforms of a waveform class.

Wave = STRING WAVE

STRING ENSEMBLE

Single shaft

WaveformClass

If you repeat the above steps, you can each of theassign three votes own waveform and thissuperimpose by placing the voices to ON. There are manyother sound parameters that can be edited in a similar mannercan. All Sound Edit parameters are in Section 6 - Standard SoundProgramming described.

Selects effectsThe effects in the KS-32 are extensively edited. There are numerousEffect parameters for each effect type. In this section we want onlydeal with the selection of raw produce effects. More on effectsand parameters, see Part 4 - Effects . Here we go!

• Press Select Sound and select ROM # 00 on. If theDisplay no ROM sounds appear, press the BankSet

1-7

Page 26


1-8

Button until the display appears ROM. Then press Bank 0 andScreen 0 .

• Press the Edit sound , followed by the Effect button ( Bank 8 ) around the00 To see the accompanying sound effect of #.

• Move the left / right cursor to the effect name (ifthis not already flashing).

• Now you can use the up / down cursor keys to select new effects.Every time an effect has been selected, you can use thedifferent screen buttons each effect parameter to theSelect each effect type.

Save a new sound

If you programmed a new sound or a current soundhave been modified to your taste, it must be stored,so that it is accessible even later. Last edited or sounds canbe secured to each of the 80 internal RAM locations. This isas follows:

1) Make sure that the Edit Sound LED flashes, and heresee:

Sound

SelectBank

BankSet

Screen

QuantizeTrackSeqCmdsSongCmdsLFO Env2

MuteTracksTrackCmdsFilter AmpOutput

LocateWave

ControlClickPitchEnv1

EffectsEffects

StoreSeqsStoreSounds

DrumsDrums

VolumePan

InternalROMA CardCard B

6 871 2 3 54 90

OutputBusKeyRangeTrans-pose PressureGrade TimbreMIDIStatus SustainPedalChannelProgram Release

Flashing

Sound

Edit

If not, press the Compare button. The flashing Edit Sound -LED indicates that the sound you hear is in the edit buffer.

2) Press the Enter • Save button. This will take you to the "WriteMode ", which is said the KS-32 that you are done editingand are now ready to save the sound. The display shows:

Save SOUND

Default Prog # 00

flashes

Page 27


3) Enter the data entry buttons to select a maximum 16-digit namefor your new sound on. Use the left / right cursor switchthe sites with the Data Entry knob and the up / down cursorButtons to enter letters or characters. If the Data-Entry knob slide all the way down, you get a space.You will notice that names with dashes, dots, orSlashes between the words look better if the sound

1 - 9 to

later appears in the display.

4) If you have entered a name, press again theEnter • Save button.

5) Use the first eight bank and screen buttons aMemory location (you know: The banks 8 and 9 are for the drumKits reserved). These buttons will show on the display, whichSounds there are still at the moment. With the BankSet buttonswitch between INT and CARD A and B. Move to aSpace whose sound you no longer need. The sounds in theMemory can thereby be even bugged by theCompare key between the sound in memory and your newSound toggle.

6) If a suitable location is found, press Enter • Save amore time. The display briefly shows "SAVED" appears before the currentParameter appears again.

Discard changes in soundIf you find that you are not using your modifications of a soundare satisfied and dear once more with the original sound all bywant to start again.

Press Compare , so that the edit sound light remains on. Theycan then start again with the original sound. ThereHowever, you will lose any edits you have made previously.

Get OutFrom the Edit PagesYou can always "get off" from the editing process if youhave decided to no longer continue working on that sound.Simply press the Select sound . To return to theSelect sound mode and can move on from there.

From the Write ModeIf you are currently in write mode, you can at any time"Off" (assuming you have not already for the third timeEnter • Save key) if you do not save more

Page 28


want. To do this press the Edit Sound button, followed by the SelectSound button. To return to the Select Sound and Fashioncan continue from there.

Copy of a sound at a different locationSometimes you may want to take an existing sound, ayou have not changed, and this simply elsewherestore. For example, if the ten most important sounds to bewant to combine a bank.

• Select the sound you want to copy to.• Press Enter • Save . The display shows "Replace Edit Sound?"• Press the Up • Yes cursor button. The selected sound is

now in the edit buffer. From there, you can now proceed exactly aspreviously described in the "Save" section.

Sequencer BasicsThe KS-32 has a 16-track sequencer with fullMixdown automation. You can import live both in real timeor enter difficult passages Step-By-Step. AnCar Locator function as well as editing free areas allows you tospecifically to at certain measures, beats, or even individual noteswork. With a large selection of editaton functions you can

1 - 10

Edit parts or experiment completely free - you can even learn newCompare ideas with the old original versions before youdecide what is to be saved.

In this part it is only once the basic outlines of the KS-32Sequencer. For more information, please refer to Part 8, 9 and 10this manual.

To create a new sequence• Press the Select Seq / Preset - in the Sequence / Preset button to

To get fashion.• The Bank and screen buttons to select an available disk space

(bank 0-6). Remember: Banks 0 to 6 contain sequencesthe benches 7 to 9 Songs. The following display appears:

PRESET ## Loc = ##

* Empty Seq / Pset *

Page 29


• Press the Enter • Save button. The display shows:

New Sequence

Location = ##

With the Data Entry knob or the Up / Down cursor - keys tonow cycle through all the available memory capacity (appear in a songthe blank song presets).

• If you have a suitable location is found, pressthe right cursor or the Enter • Save button. The display shows:

Time Signature =

4.4

Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons you can now differentEnter clock counts. The right cursor or the Enter • Save buttonmove ahead to the next value.

Press the right cursor or the Enter • Save button againand the display shows:

New name =

Sequence ##

You can now return to the Data Entry knob or theUp • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the various letters, numbers,Enter and characters for a name and with the left / right cursorButtons to select the desired location.• Now that you have space, time signature and name for the sequence

have been entered, press yet Enter • Save and the display"Command Successful!"

Selection of sounds to use

1-11

Before we can start recording, we must stilldecide what sounds like we work. For this example,We take a few sounds that are well suited for a rock sequence.Feel free to try sometimes other sounds and arrangements made.

Page 30


1 - 12 out

And here we go:• Press the Track 1 button.• Press the Replace-track sound button. The first track in this

Sequence is to be played with the sound "Big Ol 'Drum Kit".• Press Bank 8 and Screen 0 The display should look like this.:

Trk01 DRUM 80

Big Ol 'Rock Kit

• Press the Replace-track sound again key to theTo leave Replace track sound mode.

Low Track 1Before we start shooting, you should first of all with theMake sound familiar. Experiment with different patterns. For ourRock sequence, you play best with your left hand bass drum(C2) to the first and third beat and the snare (C3) to the second andfourth beat. With the right hand playing the hi-hat (E3 and F3) to8th notes. If you have practiced this pattern, you can take:

1) Keep Record and press to play. Play thePattern about 8 bars.

2) Press Stop • Continue . The display will then:

Keep Trk01 first

008 bars?

3) Now press either up • Yes or Enter • Save to the first track tokeep (KEEP NEW TRACK). Press the Play button toYou listen to the recording. If you are not recordingare satisfied, press the Down • No button and simply beginagain in front of.

Low Track 2• Press the Track 2 button.• Press the Replace-track sound button. For the second track of this

Sequence, we use the rock bass.

Page 31


1-13

• Press the BankSet button until the RAM Sound group appears.Then press bank 1 and 2 screen . The display should look like this:

Trk02 RAM 12

Rockbass

• Press the Replace-Track Sound - button again to replace theTo leave track sound mode.

Before recording the second track, you can go to the alreadypractice drum pattern recorded by the Play button.If you are ready to record, press the Stop • Continue buttonand then:• Press Record and Play . You will hear a bar count

and then begin to play. If the track is recorded, changesthe sequencer automatically in playback and plays what youhave just taken, and the display:

Press ENTER to

KEEP NEW TRACK

• Press Enter • Save to keep the newly recorded track.If you do not like the new track or listen to the originalwant, press the Down • No cursor button. The display showsthen:

Press ENTER to

KEEP OLD TRACK

• You should now be able to hear only the drum track. If you now enter • SavePress the newly recorded bass track will be deleted. WantKeep the bass track, however, press the Up • Yes cursor buttonand then enter • Save .

Record Other TracksIf you follow the steps in uptake of trace 2 repeat (top),You can select other sounds, and the remaining six tracksthe sequence record. Are the tracks once recorded, you canEdit and modify images far-reaching.

Page 32


Remember: If sequences are combined into a song,incur further eight tracks, giving a total of sixteen tracksresults. Read the parts 8,9 and 10 for further information aboutSequences.

Reworking of tracksYou've just created a separate sequence, but what happens when theDrums are not exactly in time? The KS-32 can each trackafter recording quantize and listen to the result before theChanges will be stored. This is just one of the manyPost-processing functions of the KS-32 keyboard. And so quantizeLay down a drum track:

Quantization of a track:

: 1 - 14

• Select the drum track. In our rock sequence, we have the"Big Ol 'Rock Kit" on 1 track.

• Press the Edit Seq / preset .• Select the Quantize Track (Bank 6) to. The screen looks

as follows:

SEQ £ 00 STOP

Quantize Track

• Press Enter • Save . The display shows:

Track = 1

Sequence ##

With this screen, you can select the track and the sequence youTo quantize. Since this is already the correct sequence and track,• Press again Enter • Save . Now ask the sequencer after

Note value for the quantization.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to change the resolution.

In this case we try it with quarter notes.• Press Enter • Save . Now we are prompted again

Enter • Save to press to quantize the entire track.• Press Se Enter • Save DO ENTIRE TRACK.• Press play and listen to the new version. You will be

find that bass drum and snare are right, the eighth-HiHatFigure however, has been quantized to quarter notes. That is not,what we wanted, so. , ,

Page 33


• Press the Down • No cursor button. The display shows:

Press ENTER to

KEEP OLD TRACK

• Press Enter • Save the old version (unquantized) retain(KEEP OLD TRACK). So we quantize the track again, butthis time with a higher resolution.

• Press Quantize Track (Bank 6) .• Press Enter • Save . The display shows:

Track = 1

Sequence ##

We are still in the correct sequence and the right track,that's why• Press again Enter • Save . The display we queried the resolution.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons on the resolution

Eighth notes.• Press Enter • Save . On the next screen, after again

Enter • Save asked to quantize the entire track.• Press Enter • Save DO ENTIRE TRACK.• When you play press, you can hear the re-quantized track.

You will notice that the Hi-Hat figure now on eighth-notesis quantized. So it should be, therefore,

• Press Enter • Save to save this version (KEEP NEWTRACK).

1 - 15

There are many other post-processing functions that aTrack can be modified; they are in the parts 9 and 10 detaildescribed.

Master MIDI controller functionsThe KS-32 from the factory with 30 internal "Performance Presets"delivered, on the banks of 0 to 2 can be found. These presets areintended to split and layer capabilities of the KS-32demonstrate, as well as to show the work with MIDI sound sources. Alsoif we do not know with what kind of MIDI sound sources you work,Performance Presets can be a valuable aid to understanding theKS-32 be as MIDI master keyboard.

Note : This performance presets are not saved in the internal ROM area.So if you want your KS-32 must re-initialize be

Page 34


go these patterns are lost. If you want to save the pattern presets,We recommend either a RAM card or the storage via MIDISysEx as in part 11 - Storage described.

The pattern presets:The 30 internal pattern presets follow the guidelines by the make-Default preset button can be specified. That is, in the upper roware internal sounds in the lower row MIDI sounds. Both internal,as well as MIDI sounds can be used for splits or layers (strata)be used.

1

7 8

43

5

2

6

LocalLocalLayer LocalUpper SplitLocalLower Split

MIDI MIDILayer MIDIUpper SplitMIDILower Split

Create splits and layersThe KS-32, you can create your own keyboard splits, or internaland MIDI sounds be layered (doubled). This controller features could be considered asPresets are saved and are then available on call. The defaultPreset template is used as the default template for MIDI master keyboardApplications. This makes it possible, in a simple soundTo start sound mode, then additional touch of a buttonto be layered internal / external sounds or splitting. Let us once aPerformance Preset select:

• Press the Select Sounds button and then select anotherSound on which you want to combine with the first one. Then selectback to the first sound, so that these can be seen on the display.

• Now press the Make-default preset button. Your preset is nowautomatically as Default preset template created.

• The sound that was selected in the Sound just fashion, as the make-Default preset had pressed button is now in lanes 1, 3, 4, 5, 7been copied and 8. Its effect settings are automaticallythe ESP loaded.

• The penultimate sound that you had been selected in the sound mode is inlanes 2 and 6. This gives you instant access to these soundfor the layer.

• All MIDI channels of the tracks are eigestellt on the base channel youunder System • MIDI, Screen 4 can set.

• Tracks 1-4 have MIDI Status = LOCAL.• Tracks 5-8 have MIDI Status = MIDI.• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = LOCAL, appears

Default preset with track. 1

: 1 - 16

Page 35


: 1 - 17

• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = BOTH, appearsDefault preset layered together with Track 1 and 5.

• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = MIDI or * EXT *the default preset appears only track. 5

• The tracks 3 and 7 have as KeyRange preset A0 - B3. Thus, foryou instantly call up keyboard splits for the lower half of the keyboard,both internally via MIDI.

• The Tracks 4 and 8 have as KeyRange preset C4 - C8. Thus, foryou instantly call up keyboard splits for the upper half of the keyboard - evenagain internally and via MIDI.

• The name of the new preset is first "Sequence ##", where ## of theMemory number corresponds with the preset automaticallyhas been saved. This name can be any time in the Edit Seq / Preset Modeunder Seq Commands , Screen 4 be amended ("Rename SEQ / Pset").

More about Performance presets and the default preset functionRefer to Section 8 - Presets .

Page 36Page 37

KS-32 user guide Part 2 - Overview

Part 2 - Overview

This part is an introduction to the various buttons, controls andConnection jacks on the back of the KS-32, a conceptual

2 - 1

Overview of the entire system, a help for the selection of sounds,Presets and sequences, as well as a discussion of the post-processing ofdifferent parameter types. We recommend you this Abscnittread this carefully - so make the most of your KS-32Keyboard.

Ports on the back .............................................. ..................... 2 - 2MIDI Thru ............................................... ....................................... 2 - 2MIDI Out ............................................... ......................................... 2 - 2MIDI In ............................................... ............................................ 2 - 2Foot switch input ............................................. .............................. 2 - 2Memory card slot ............................................. ....................... 2 - 3Pedal / CV ............................................... .......................................... 2 - 3Right / Mono output ............................................. ............................ 2 - 3Left / Mono output ............................................. .............................. 2 - 3

Headphones ................................................. ................................................ 2 - 4Performance controllers ............................................... ............................. 2-4The front panel - Communication with the KS-32 ....................... 2-5

The Select Sound button ............................................ ....................... 2 - 6The edit sound button ............................................ .......................... 2 - 6The BankSet button .............................................. ............................ 2 - 6The Bank buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 7The screen buttons .............................................. ............................. 2 - 7The Select Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ......... 2 - 8The Edit Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 8The Edit track button ............................................ ........................... 2 - 8The track buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 8The drive buttons .............................................. ........................ 2 - 9The Replace-track sound button .......................................... ........... 2 - 9The make-default preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 9The System • MIDI button ............................................ ...................... 2 - 9

The MIDI connections .............................................. .......................... 2-10Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectors ......................... 2-10MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instruments ...................... 2 - 11MIDI Track Configuration ............................................. ....................... 2 - 11Parametric programming ................................................ ............. 2 - 12Change a parameter ............................................... .................... 2 - 13About this Guide ............................................... ............................... 2 - 14KS-32 Accessories .............................................. ......................................... 2-15

Page 38

Part 2 - Overview KS-32 user guide

Ports on the back

MIDI RightLeftMono

AudioOut

Thru Out In Ft. Sw. Pedal • CV

7 863 421 5

Memory Card

1) MIDI ThruAt this MIDI port, all data is passed unchanged,received at the MIDI IN connector. This allows moreDevices in a kind of series are concatenated.

2 - 2

2) MIDI OutMIDI output can be sent via the MIDI data to other devicescan. The data received at the MIDI IN are not here.

3) MIDI InMIDI input, which can receive the KS-32 MIDI data.

4) footswitch inputConnection for footswitch. This connector supports two types ofFootswitches:

• The supplied ENSONIQ SW-6 pedal normally functions asSustain pedal. Other functions can be programmed.

• With the optional double pedal SW-5 with the right pedalSustain function is retrieved. The left pedal can be carriedcorresponding parameter in the system database program (Sostenuto,Start / stop the sequencer etc.) See Part 2, System Bank , for furtherInformation.

Page 39


If a SW 5 / SW-10is connected:

The right pedal worksas Sustain Footswitch

The left pedal worksas Aux. Footswitch

If a SW-6 footswitchis connected:

The pedal worksas a sustain pedal

5) memory card slotIf you insert a RAM or ROM card into this slot, haveYou instant access to another 160 sounds, divided into two banks(CARD A and B CARD) and / or sequence data.

6) Pedal / CVConnector for the optional ENSONIQ CVP-1 control voltage pedal.This pedal can except for volume or for many other modulationsbe used in the KS-32. It can, for. Example, instead of the modulation wheelare used so that the hands remain free to play.Technical Specifications: 6.3 mm stereo jack (tip = Kontrollspan--voltage input, ring = 2k � resistance to +12 volts, shell = earth). ScanRate = 32ms; recommended maximum modulation = 15 Hz. When usingan external power source should be a two-wire cable with voltagebe used to point to earth to cover.

7) Right / Mono OutputLine output for the right stereo channel. If the left output does notis used here is a mono mix signal.

8) Left / Mono outputLine output for the left stereo channel. If the right outputnothing is connected, there is also a mono signal.

2 - 3

Page 40


2-4

Pitch BendWheel

ModulationWheel

HeadphoneBush

HeadphoneTo hear the KS-32 stereo headphones, close yourHeadphones over this jack. The headphone volume isthe volume control on the front-side controlled (note that aHeadphones in this jack is not automatically the normal audioOutputs mute).

Warning : The headphone output is optimized for headphones with a medium levelor high impedance (50-600 ohms). If you headphones with lowerUse impedance (8 ohms "Walkman" headphones), turn theVolume control back, because the high output level could yourEars hurt.

Performance ControllerThe KS-32 has several real-time performance controllers with whichcan be modulated and changed the sounds. Two of the most importantlocated to the left of the keyboard:

• PITCH BEND WHEEL - This wheel shifts the pitch of a toneup or down. Normally, the wheelCenter position, where it has no influence on the sound - moved to theWheel up or down, the pitch is in a particularInterval shifted, depending on the setting of the global BendParameter under System • MIDI, Screen 0th

• MODULATION WHEEL - Perhaps the most popular purpose of modulationtionsrads is the generation of vibrato, but it can also be used for entirely differentPurposes are used for. Example, to pitch, tone, volume andmany other sound components to modulate.


2-5

• CHANNEL aftertouch is a modulator, with a sound invery different ways by subsequent depression of aalready depressed key can be affected. ChannelCalled aftertouch, and Channel Pressure or monophonic aftertouch,affects all pressed keys simultaneously, even when the pressureis applied only to a key. If you, for example, athree note chord attack and one of the three notes with aftertouchmodulate still be all three tones modulated.

The front panel - Communication with the KS-32The user interface of the KS-32 is designed to be quick and easyswitch between the different functional areas of the KS-32 andcan herwandern, whether now retrieve sounds or sequenceswant to record.Therefore, the KS-32 is always in one of these seven modes(MODES):

1 - Sound-Select Mode2 - Sound Edit mode3 - Sequence / Preset Select Mode4 - Sequence / Preset Edit mode5 - Track Edit mode (a sub-mode of the Sequence / Preset Edit

Mode)6 - Replace-track sound mode7 - System • MIDI Edit mode

You can access these modes over the seven mode keys (if youhave selected a mode can be accessed via the bank - and ScreenButtons to select the various parameters of the respective modes).

The display and the data input keys are mainly used forSelecting and modifying used. This information can include sounds, parameters,MIDI functions, etc., depending on which button on the front panelis pressed.

Page 42


WavePitch Env1 LFO Env2 Amp Output SoundsFilter

LocateControlClick Song Seq Quantize

Select

DrumsDrumsBank

Sound

Edit

Sound

BankSet

Release

ScreenChannelProgram

ROMA Card

VolumePan KeyRange MIDIStatusPressureGradeSustainPedal

Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

2 Edit Sound 7 Edit Seq / Preset4 Bank buttons 8 Edit Track3 BankSet

1

Edit

Seq / Preset

Seq / Preset

SelectTrackEdit

LayerLock

2 - 6

1 Select Sound 6 Select Seq / PresetScreen 5 keys

1) Select Sound buttonPress the Select -Sound key to move to the Select SoundsMode (LED lights up). Each time you select a new soundwant this key to be pressed. Then you can use theBankSet, bank and screen buttons call up the available sounds.

2) The edit sound buttonPress the Edit -Sound key to move to the sound EditMode (LED lights up). Here, the sounds can be modified. AllSound parameters can be of this mode of reach (waveformsEnvelopes, etc.) with the Bank and screen keys to go to theindividual parameters of the Sound Edit Mode.

3) The key BankSetThe BankSet key switches both in the Select Sound mode, as well as inReplace Track Sound Mode to toggle between the different sound groups.By repeatedly pressing the BankSet button appear one after anotherthe different sound groups. If you BankSet key pressedhold, you can use the BI keys 0-4 individual sound groups alsoselected directly.

Pressing the BankSet button simultaneously MIDI Bank Select toMessages and ENSONIQs special bank "Control" -Programmwechselsent.

When storing edited sounds is the BankSet the buttonTarget group (INT / CARD) changed.

Page 43


4) The Bank buttonsThe ten small buttons in the center of the front panel hot bankingKeys. Bank buttons are used to certain groups of pa-meters, commands, sounds or sequences / recall presets. WhichBanks can be selected depends on the selected mode.

To view the exact function of the Bank to facilitate buttons was aColor code selected in the caption. You will notice that thetwo rows Minutes of the bank keys are kept in green and pink.Here you can see which banks parameters via the bank select buttonsbe.Now you look at my two rows printed under the screen -Keys. You will find that these in green and pinkare labeled. Here you can see which parameters through e-mail the screensScreen - keys can be selected. Are you in the Sound Edit mode(LED), the bank names will be enabled in green. Banks, from theSequence are selected / preset edit mode from are represented pink(Corresponding LED is lit). The bottom row of screen names in pink(Under the respective screen - keys) from the System • MIDI mode offselected (again, by the corresponding LED).

As you can imagine, are the Sound Select or Sequence /Preset Mode on the bank buttons again only in each case the correspondingSoundbanks selected.

5) The screen buttonsThe ten major keys directly below the Bank buttons hot ScreenKeys. Screen - keys are used in a particular bank

2 - 7

To select specific pages parameters.

Tip : There is another way to get the various screens,belonging to a bank to look at. Once you have selected a bank, you can repeatedly press the same bank - the keycall different screens that bank. In addition, you can alwaysgo to one of the first screen of a bank by thecorresponding bank - button pressed for about one second.

When behind a screen - several parameters are hidden key,can this also by repeatedly pressing the screen button on theSequentially call. The Screen - buttons have a secondary function:If you hold it longer, the respective first parameter appears thisScreens.

Page 44


6) Select Sequence / Preset buttonWith the Select-Sequence / Preset button to the right of the screen - keys,leads to the Sequence / Preset Select Mode (LED). AfterPress this button you can with the Bank and screen buttonsSequences, select and play songs and presets.

7) Edit Sequence / Preset buttonWith the Edit Sequence / Preset button , on the Edit Track reaches buttonone in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode (LED on). It is always aTrail running. This mode performs tasks such as creating new presetsand sequences, tempo setting, click Status etc. With the Bank andScreen buttons are the individual parameters and commands of the EditSequence / Preset Mode called. The track buttons determine whichTrack to be edited.

8) The Edit Track buttonPressing the Edit Track button below the edit-Seq / Preset button ,the corresponding LED lights up and you can quickly each trackReach parameters. The Edit Sequence / Preset LED is also lit toTo remind you that the Edit Track button like a eleventh BankButton in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode behaves. Behave the track buttonsjust like in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. You decide whichTrack to be edited. Use the left / right cursor keys orby repeatedly pressing the edit track , you can pressgo through different parameters. The screen buttons can alsobe used for the direct election of certain parameters, such as from the descriptioninscription can be seen. Pressing any key bankautomatically takes you to the Sequence / Preset Edit mode of the KS-32.

11 Replace Track Sound button9 Track buttons

10 drive buttons 13 System • MIDI buttonSystem • MIDI

ReplaceSound Track

MakeDefault preset

Record Stop Play

Continue

12 Make Default Preset button

1

7 8

43

5

2

6

9) The track buttonsIn the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, the track buttons to select are theeight individual tracks used. Each track is a different soundand a set of Related Performance parameters included. ByDouble-click on a track button, while another track alreadyis selected, you can multiple tracks together to double (be layered).

2 - 8

If sequences have been linked to a song, the sameeight track buttons

Page 45


2 - 9

also used for selecting the additional song tracks - the resultstogether sixteen tracks.

10) The drive buttonsThe "drive buttons" are used to start the sequencer tostop or continue running, as well as in the record or overdubTo get fashion.

11) Replace-track sound buttonIf the Replace-track sound key, the over the make-Default preset - key is, its LED and the KS-32 is flashing in theReplace-track sound mode. In this mode, the sounds can in theindividual tracks in a sequence of presets to be replaced. Aboutreplace a sound along with its effect, hold the REPLACETrack Sound - key and then press one of the track buttons.More on this in Part 8 - Presets.

12) Make-default preset buttonIf you are in the Select Sound mode, you can use the make-defaultPreset button the current sound automatically together with its effect in thePreset copy buffer memory. In addition, predefined trackRetrieve settings for each track, which is a "Default Template"(Template) results. This template is used as a base for MIDIMaster Keyboard applications.

If you are in Sequence / Preset Mode, pressing theMake-default preset - button a copy of the track parameter settingsmade, so then under a new name to the other this presetCan save point.

13) System • MIDI buttonAbout the System • MIDI button you can reach all the global system andMIDI parameters. The System • MIDI LED lights. The KS-32 remainsin current mode (sound mode or Sequence / Preset mode).

By repeatedly pressing the System • MIDI key or theLeft / right cursor keys to browse through the variousSystem • MIDI switch parameter. The screen buttons call parametersdirectly. The names of the parameters are shown in pink below the screen -Keys listed. You leave through the System • MIDI Edit modePress another mode or track button.

Page 46


The MIDI connections

2-10

Musical Instrument Digital Interface - the magical connection with thea keyboard (or a whole cottage fully) played by another ofcan be. MIDI is a standard to which agreed by the manufacturerhave. Musical parameters are converted into digital informationtransformed, transmitted and received MIDI Instrumentscan.

When they play, for example, a C 3 on the KS-32, is theMIDI Out sends a combination of numbers that press a keyrepresents, together with the number keys and the dynamics. LetYou release the button, sends the KS-32, a message, thethe sound cancels. Understands a connected MIDI instrumentthis information and then plays itself this C 3. The same happensif they change a controller, eg. as the modulation wheel, or ifa new sound is called - each of these events is indicated in figurestransforms, which are then transmitted via the MIDI Out.

Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectorsYou can use the sequences / presets of the KS-32 to external MIDIControl devices, which multiply the number of available soundscan. A sequencer, or preset song track can with MIDI Statusbe used to control external MIDI only by, or in the LOCALPlaying status exclusively internal KS-32 sounds; or BOTHdo both at the same time.In this setup, each device uses only its MIDI data, while theare other simply forwarded. In addition, each unit ofits own keyboard are played out, and the KS-32 without theto influence others, for the THRU jacks only incomingFurther data is transmitted but not the self-generated.

external MIDIDevice # 1


MIDI Out

MIDI InMIDI Thru

MIDI In


MIDI Thru MIDI In

to another MIDIInstruments

MIDI Thru

KS-32

Page 47


With this setup, you can drive right from the KS-32 off all devices.Simply by dialing the track, the same MIDI channel has asthe concerned MIDI instrument. You can then:Play 1) This instrument from the keyboard of the KS-32 from;2) A track record, then the question of the instrument

is played.3) The receiving MIDI device program change messages

send, and the volume control (assuming it processesController 7)

In other words, once you have the correct MIDI connections andProgramming found, the KS-32, a complete MIDI systemcontrol as a master keyboard and sequencer.

MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instrumentsThe next step is, each driven instrument, each expanderbe set so that it only receives the information intended for him.Does every another broadcast channel (or multi-mode multiple)

2 - 11

They can all be controlled by the KS-32.

For each external tool:• Set POLY (OMNI OFF) or MULTI mode. Each instrument

must be in a mode where it only on selected MIDI channelsreceives. This is the POLY mode for one or the MULTI mode formultiple channels. You should research the questionManuals on the device.

• Select a MIDI channel (or more). Best of all, each deviceits channel (s) to assign, and to have them always eingstelltThen you always know what channel a track must have ato control particular instrument. If you are using the sequencer,You can always be sure that the correct instrument the rightTrack is playing.

Have you made this channel settings once you write everythingto, and use this table as a reference for each new preset, foreach new sequence.

MIDI Track ConfigurationOnce you have made all these settings and your instrument aswired described above, you can now right track in aSequence or a preset together.

For each track, that an external MIDI instrument is intended to drive, selectThe MIDI status, the corresponding MIDI channel and

Page 48


an appropriate program number. These parameters are in Part 8 -Presets described in detail.

Note: The KS-32 transmits release velocity (which is theSpeed can be released with the key). Some more recentKeyboards process these messages, thus enabling even finerArticulation of sounds. The internal sounds of the KS-32 process, however,No release velocity.

Parametric Programming

Enter • Save

Compare

32 CharacterLCD Display

YesNo

Volume Data Entry

The method used to edit the sounds, presets and system parameters,is called screen-oriented, parametric programming . Thesounds more powerful, but is not so bad. If you have some basicUnderstand things, you will find that the operation of theKS-32 is fairly simple, despite the many parameters.

You may already something of parametric programminghave met with other synthesizers. It means nothing,as it is no longer a separate controller or switch for each functionare but a main input controller, the data entry controller , and twoLeft / right cursor keys to change parameters.This method has many advantages, especially the that at the requiredHardware knobs, switches, buttons etc. - so many functionscontrol is greatly reduced. (Had the KS-32 a separate controllerfor each parameter, it would have hundreds of them.)

2 - 12

There is a simple method, the value of a parameter to zeroset when "zero" of the average value. Press the down button andto the Up button and let then quickly release both buttons. This sets theSet automatically to the center position.

ScreensBy the 32-digit LCD display it is possible to obtain information in so-called.Display screens (screens). Each time one of the frontPanel buttons is pressed, a new screen is practically called. Iscalled such a screen, you can see the individual functions of thisRead and change screens.

Page 49


2 - 13

Multiple parametersSome of the KS-32 screens contain more than one editable parameters.If such a screen called, there are two ways betweenThese parameters toggle:• The left / right cursor keys. These keys are used by the

individual parameters of a screen "scroll" and at the end of the nextChanged screen.

• The screen buttons. By repeatedly pressing a screen button is"scroll" through the parameters of the respective screens. Holding theScreen button for about a second, the first parameter of the screen iscalled.

Change of a parameterSuppose you want the mood of the current voice of the currentlychange the selected sound. That is a pitch parameters, so mustFirst, the pitch call-Bank. Which can be reached by pressing theEdit - Sound - key followed by the Pitch button ( Bank 1 ) and Screen 0 The.Display will look like this.

Oct 0 = + = + 00 Semi

Fine = + 00

The Oct (Octave) parameter appears. This value is flashing, which meansthat said parameter is selected and now can be changed.The value of the currently selected parameter on a screen flashesAlways.

If you have selected a parameter, you can use the Data EntryController or with the up / down cursor change its value:• Move the slider, you can use the parameter over the entire

Change area. A slow movement changes the parametersrelative to its previous value. A fast moving leaves him onThe value jumps corresponding to the position of the controller.

• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to increase or decrease youthe value by one step. Press and hold one of the keysare run through the values quickly.

If you edit multiple voices simultaneously, adding to the EditSound Voice Select Screen ( bank 0, Screen 1 set), the value "ALL"is to be with the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor the values of the individualVoices relative change each other, rather than for all the voices in the displayedTo incorporate value.

Tip : It git a simple method parameter to "submit" to mean ahave, as the pitch / Octave parameter in this example. While you

2 - 13

Page 50


2 - 14

the Down • No cursor hold, press the Up • Yes-cursor(Or vice versa) and then release both buttons simultaneously. Therebythe parameter is set exactly to the mean.

Change a parameter when you call another screen, thereand then return to the pitch bank, Screen 0 go, there is the lastflashing selected parameter again. The KS-32 "remembers" the respectivelast selected parameters on each screen.

Make sure that the parameter you want to changeis really dialed before the data entry control or theUp • Yes / No • Down cursor keys to move. There is always someParameters on each screen active, so be careful that you do not accidentallythe wrong change.

About this GuideThe KS-32 assigns its parameters and commands in the so-called screens on.Each screen has his own addressing , a two-digit number,indicating its position. The first number refers to the bank to whichhe heard the second number is the position of the screen in this bank. ThisPosition on the bench and screen called keys.

In this owner certain parameters or commandsbe addressed is an illustration of the exact position of theDisplayed parameter and how to deal with a "speed dial number" therereaches. It looks for example like this:

21 Click Volume / Pan ClickClick Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 1

Parameter

Bank Name Help for finding the Param.

Screen address:Bank # Screen #

These representations do not only facilitate the classification of these instructions incertain sections, but they also contain the following four importantInformation about the parameter which is being treated:

• Screen-address - The two-digit number represents the position of theParameter. In this case "21".

• Parameter Name - This is the name of the parameter. ToEnglish, as it appears in the display. Has a screen more than oneParameters, these are separated by slashes (/).

• Bank Name - Displays the bank in which the screen is. TheName is found in the list of bank name again, which the bankAre keys of the KS-32

• Help to find - here is how to get to the parameter.LED is illuminated, the mode button does not need to be pressed againbe.

Page 51


Note : Sometimes for a screen addressing any bank number is available;For example, the screen addresses graphics for Edit Mode and TrackSystem • MIDI mode. They are with ET and SM shown.

KS-32 AccessoriesThe following optional accessories at your ENSONIQ available dealers:• SW 5 / SW-10 footswitch - This dual footswitch can be used for sustain,

Sostenuto or used to start and stop the sequencer

2-15

be.• CVP-1 Pedal - A voltage control pedal, either as

Modulation source within a Voice or as a volume pedalcan be used.

• MC-32 RAM cards - To store sounds and sequencesThat you have created or edited. Sounds and sequences ona MC-32 are stored exactly as in the internal memory.

• ROM cards SC Series - Contains 160 additional factory sounds. In theUnlike the MC-32, the sounds on a SD-card permanently storedand can not be deleted.

• ROM cards ISC Series - Contains 160 sounds by leading soundDevelopers from around the world. In contrast to the MC-32, the sounds are onan SC card securely stored and can not be deleted.

• SQX 70 - sequencer memory expansion. Increases the capacity of theKS-32 sequencer to 58,000 notes. Request more informationto install your authorized ENSONIQ dealers.

Page 52Page 53

KS-32 user guide Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

• These parameters cover instrument cross-system and MIDIFunctions from.Master Tune ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 2Global Bend ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 2Touch........................................................................................................3 - 2FtswL - Foot Switch Left ........................................... ........................... 3-7Pedal .........................................................................................................3 - 8MIDI parameters ............................................... ........................................ 3-9Base-Channel............................................................................................3 - 9Base channel MIDI Status .............................................. ........................... 3-10Basic Channel Afterouch type .............................................. ........................ 3-10MIDI Mode - MIDI In Fashion ......................................... ..................... 3-11MONO mode ............................................... .......................................... 3-12Global controller in MONO mode ........................................... .......... 3-12XCtrl - External controller .............................................. ...................... 3-12Controller ................................................. ............................................. 3 - 13ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" -Programmwechselbefehle ........ 3-14Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 3-14System Excl - System Exclusive messages ....................................... 3 - 15MIDI Trk Name ............................................. ........................................ 3 - 16MIDI loop ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 16

3 - 1

The System • MIDI buttonThe System • MIDI button leads to various screens. This Screensprovide access to the system and MIDI parameters, complete theAffect instrument. These parameters remain continuously active- Even when the KS-32 is turned off.

Press the System • MIDI to key in the System • MIDI mode toreach. Press the screen keys 0 to 9 to the variousSystem • MIDI parameters to achieve. The KS-32 remains in the currentMode (Sound mode or Sequence / Preset mode). If the System • MIDIButton from the Select Sound Mode from was then jump the KS-32 atPress a bank - key in edit mode sounds. The same happensfrom the Sequence / Preset mode, skip the KS-32 when you press aBank button in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode.

Page 54

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings KS-32 user guide

SM0 Press System • MIDI / Screen 0th

Master Tune / Global BendSystem MIDI Edit

Master Tune = +00

Global Bend = 02

Master TuneAdjusts the overall pitch of the keyboard to the extent of one semitoneup and down. The value of +00 entstpricht the pitch A = 440 Hz.Scope: -99 to +99 cents.

Global BendSpecifies the control range for the Pitch Bend wheel. Each step corresponds toa semitone.

Follow the value of an "H", react only hand-held notes on pitchBend. Sounds that are held with the sustain pedal, do not respondand keep their pitch. This allows typical guitar-effectsproduce.

Area: 0 to 12, 1 H-12H in semitones

SM1

Touch / Pressure ThresholdSystem • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 1

Touch = PIANO VEL1

Pressure = MEDIUM

TouchHere, the sensitivity of the keyboard is set to match yourpersonal feel. All dynamic curves relate to both internalas well controlled MIDI sounds. There are 14 different settings:

• PIANO VEL1 • SYNTH VEL1 • FIXED V 64

3-2

• PIANO VEL2 • SYNTH VEL2 • FIXED V 127• PIANO VEL3 • SYNTH VEL3• PIANO VEL4 • SYNTH VEL4• PIANO VEL5 • SYNTH VEL5• PIANO VEL6 • SYNTH VEL6

Page 55


3-3

Note: If you use a PIANO curve, you will hear no sound when youeasily strike. This corresponds exactly to a real piano. Withthe SYNTH curves you hear always a sound, even with very lightStop. That is the only difference between PIANO and SYNTHDynamic curves.

Dynamic Curve diagram

Keyboard Velocity0 127

MIDINote OnVelocity

0

127

6432 96

64

32

96

The dynamic curves (Touch) offer a wide rangeexpressive techniques, as shown in the following pages:

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL1

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL1 - For someone with a slight Anchlag. In thisSetting can be the maximum value of each dynamics-controlledParameters reach very easily.

Page 56


3-4

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL2

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL 2 - For someone with a little more velocity,but still easy.

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL3

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL3 - The default setting for averageStop. This setting should fit most musicians.

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL4

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL4 - This setting corresponds most closely to the"Classically" trained pianist with strong fingers and offerstrained musicians the largest dynamic range.

Page 57


0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL5

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL5 - This setting is for musicians with strongFingers who prefer a softer sound, it requires a lot of power forthe loud sounds.

3-5

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

VEL6

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL6 - This setting is for musicians who muchWant to have control over their soft stop. The curve has muchSpace for a continuous increase in the volume with a"Jump" at the end of volume accents.

0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

FIXED V 64

• FIXED V 64 - This setting is a fixed value of dynamicmedium intensity transmitted at each stop-strength. This settingis well suited for the simulation old synthesizer sounds without dynamiccontrol.

Page 58


0 1270

127

6432 96

64

32

96

FIXED V127

• FIXED V128 - This is also a fixed value, this time at full intensity.Good for drums / percussion sounds if the part without dynamicChange to be recorded.

Note: We recommend that you start with the default setting (VEL3) and thenscroll up or down until the desired effect is achievedis.

: 3 - 6

Page 59


Pressure ThresholdThis parameter can aftertouch sensitivity of theCustomize Keyboard personal playing. There are fourSettings Pressure: SOFT, MED, FIRM and HARD. The Pressure-Threshold can be between SOFT (soft, miminaler effortrequired) and FIRM (hard, maximum force required)be set.

• SOFT - This setting is designed specifically for Musikter playing softly.In this setting, even a slight push to the maximumAftertouch modulation to achieve.

• MEDIUM - A little more pressure is needed to complete aftertouchto reach.

• FIRM - Corresponds to the average aftertouch sensitivity.This setting should be perceived as pleasant in most casesbe.

• HARD - The setting for the musician with very hard.Requires the highest effort to see the full aftertouchTo achieve modulation.

SM2

FtswL / FtswRSystem • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 2

FtswL = UNUSED

FtswR = SUSTAIN

FtswL - Foot Switch LeftThis parameter applies only if the additional double footIs SW-5 / SW-10 is connected. Then the entries for the left applyPedal.

• UNUSED - The KS-32 ignores the Left Footswitch

If you're using the included foot switch (SW-6), should thisParameters to be UNUSED.

• SOSTENUTO - turns the sostenuto pedal footswitch. Allkeyboard will be held, all subsequently played notesattenuated.

• START / STOP - The foot switch takes over the function of theStop • Continue button in the sequencer, so Stop or Continue(Next Play).

3-7

Page 60


3-8

FtswR - Foot-Switch-RightControls the function of the supplied Fußschalers SW-6 or theright pedal in SW 5 / SW-10 (optional).• SUSTAIN - Keeps the notes even after releasing the keys, such as the

right pedal on a piano.• START / STOP footswitch -The takes over the function of the

Stop • Continue button in the sequencer, so Stopping and continue playing.

Note: Both sustain and sostenuto pedals can be used tothe current aftertouch modulation value "hold". And here's how:1) Select a sound that responds to aftertouch. The most suitable

a standing sound such. as the oboe.2) Play a note and modulate it with aftertouch.3) Press and hold the sustain or sostenuto pedal.4) Release the button. You will hear that the sound still

is modulated with aftertouch - with the same intensity as to theTime when you release the button.

5) Now play a different note. Note that the new note notis modulated. You can now use the new note, regardless of theheld modulate. Once the value of the new note to the oldexceeds the value of the new note is taken of both tones.

6) To remove the modulation on the held note, simplythe same button again, or simply release the pedal.

SM3

Pedal / voice mutingSystem • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 3

Pedal = MOD # 4

Voice muting = ON

PedalDetermines whether the additional CVP-1 pedal as a volume orPedal acts:

• Volume # 7 - The foot pedal controls the volume of the KS-32.• Mod # 4 -The foot pedal controls all parameters PEDAL than

Use modulation source.

The "7" and "4" refers to the controller number in the MIDISpecification. Read more in the MIDI implementation in Appendix 2 .

Page 61


Voice mutingThis parameter determines whether held tones when changing soundsshould be cut off or not. It can cause interference inAvoid effect change. Or you can use the advantage of seamlessTransition between different sounds.

3-9

• ON - Every time you open a new sound, are stillsounding notes cut off.

• OFF - When you visit a new sound, sound sustained notesstill ahead until you strike with the old sound new again.The old notes have, however, run on the new effect, whichpossibly completely different coloring of the sound may result.

MIDI parametersFew developments have so much influence in recent yearshad on the development of music as MIDI. Whether you are simply twoKeyboards interconnect synthesizer from a guitar-to-MIDISystem play, or control a sampler with drum pads: MIDI makes itpossible! MIDI has various developments brought together, andhave other ideas first place. ENSONIQ was always in thefirst row when it comes to MIDI developments. The KS-32 provides it withits state-of-the-art sequencer, the master keyboard functions andits multi-mode sound generator the current state of developmentis.

SM4

Base Channel / StatusSystem • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 4

Base Channel = 01

Status = BOTH

Base ChannelSpecifies the base channel on which the KS-32 sends MIDI data andreceives. The base channel is used to send MIDI data andreceived while the KS-32 is in the Sound Select Mode.If you are in a sequence or a preset, apply hereselected MIDI parameters and the respective track channels. SystemExclusive messages are always sent on the basic channel andreceived.

Range: 01 to 16

Each of the 16 MIDI channels can be selected as the base channel. WhichEffect, the basic channel depends on the selected MIDI mode.

Page 62


Receiving The POLY mode, notes, controllers and programexchange information only detected when you're at theBase channel are received. In the MONO-A-modeProgram Change receive only the basic channel. Thisis simultaneously in both MONO mode, the first of 8Individual channels, with which the KS-32 is operating.

Send The KS-32 has a fixed MIDI transmission scheme, depending on thethe selected mode. In the sound-select mode sends the KS-32always on the base channel. In sequencer mode transmits theKS-32 to the separate track channels.

Based channel MIDI StatusThis screen determines the MIDI status of the base channel. There are fourpossible settings:

• play BOTH notes, controller and program change internal and(Via MIDI) external sounds on the selected MIDI channel.Incoming data play internal sounds.

LOCAL • The base channel controls only internal sounds. There are noMIDI data sent. Control incoming MIDI datainternal sounds of.

• MIDI Notes, controller etc. are only sent via MIDI, if on

3-10

the keyboard is played. Incoming data control internalSounds. This mode corresponds to the LOCAL OFF otherInstruments. Take this fashion to external devicesplay.

• * EXT * Has the same function as MIDI, with the difference thatincoming MIDI data allude no internal sounds. Theis useful if the KS-32 along with other MIDIDevices and an external sequencer operates.

SM5

Base Channel PressureSystem • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 5

Base Channel

Pressure = CHANNEL

Based channel Afterouch typeDetermines what type of aftertouch to the KS-32 received via MIDI.This parameter also determines whether on the basis of channel aftertouchto be / transferred internally externally or not.

• NONE - The KS-32 receives no aftertouch and keyboardproduces no aftertouch data.

Page 63


• KEY - The KS-32 receives polyphonic aftertouch on the base channelvia MIDI, while the keyboard still generates channel aftertouch.This particular type aftertouch allows an individual modulation foreach key as many ENSONIQ , devices, such as EPS, EPS-16 PLUSSD-1, SD-1 32VOICE, SQ-80 and VFX VFX SD can be found.

• CHANNEL - The KS-32 receives and transmits Channel Aftertouch (ormonophonic aftertouch). This is the common form. Modulationalways affects the entire keyboard.

Note: The keyboard of the KS-32 itself can only generate Channel Aftertouch,However, both are received via MIDI aftertouch types.

SM6

MIDI Mode / XCtrlSystem • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 6

MIDI Mode = OMNI

XCtrl = 02

MIDI Mode - MIDI In FashionThis parameter determines how MIDI information from the KS-32received are. MIDI mode has no influence on the transmission ofMIDI information:

There are five MIDI modes in the KS-32:

• OMNI - In this mode, receives the KS-32 on all 16 MIDIChannels. This is useful if you only work with a few devices,and no separate channels are required.

• POLY - In this mode, the KS-32 receives only the basic channel.Data on other channels are ignored.

• MULTI - A ENSONIQ development. MULTI mode is the keyfor the use of the KS-32 as a multi-mode tone generator of aexternal sequencer driven. In MULTI mode, the eight tracks(Sequence or song) independently and polyphonic MIDI on 8 verschiednenReceive channels. It is easy to empty sequences as a templateproduce to receive the Multi-Mode; see Part 8 - Presets .

Range 3 - 11

For each track on which is to be received, should have differentMIDI channels can be set. This is done on the Edit track MIDIChannel Screen (See Part 8 - Presets ).

In MULTI mode, it always depends on the MIDI channel, the receivedis that just sounds are listening to, regardless of the currentlyselected sound on the front panel.

Page 64


3-12

MONO modeThe MONO mode is particularly useful for use with MIDIGuitars, or whenever verchiedene 8, monophonic voices / channelsseem sensible.

The KS-32 has two different mono-mode. Receives in both modesthe KS-32 monophonic eight independent channels, continuouslynumbered upwards from the base channel. The difference is the way in whichhow this information is forwarded in the KS-32.

• MONO A - Another ENSONIQ evolution, the use ofmulti-channel controllers (such as guitars) to cope with. All notes andController always play the sound that has just been selected,such as from the keyboard. You have the advantage that each note ona separate channel is processed and the controller thus quiteaddressed individually, but you do not each track individually with aSound must prove.

• MONO B - This is the conventional MONO mode. Now here is eachTrack in the current sequence or a monophonic songSynthesizer. Only in this fashion can be for each string a guitarSet your own sound.

Global controller in MONO modeGlobal Controller is controller data transmitted on a channelbe, but also affect other channels simultaneously. This canbe useful to reduce incidental MIDI data and at the same timeTo avoid delays. Some Guitar Controller Send GlobalController; the KS-32 understands.

In MONO mode (A or B) of the base channel minus one for the channelglobal controllers (Pitch Bend, Aftertouch, etc.). If the base channelFor example, 3 Controller data on channel 2 as a global controller wouldbe interpreted, and affect all voices played. If theBasic Channel 1, Channel 16 is a global controller channel. Neverthelessreceives each track individually, the controller data on your ownReceiving channel. For example, each string own pitch bendhave, during the "whammy bar" controller on the global channelcan be sent to then modulate all votes.

XCtrl - Remote ControllerWith XCtrl an external MIDI controller for the KS-32 can be usedbe.

Area: 01 to 95 can

Page 65


3-13

Most MIDI controller such. B.Modulationsrad or breath controller- Have a controller number and can as a modulatorbe individually assigned for many parameters in the KS-32.

One of the modulation sources offered, the sound in Edit modecan be used XCTRL is. The value for "XCtrl" is a MIDIController number from 01 to 95. The KS-32 receives controllerMessages depending on the controller number. If suchReceive messages, they are at each passed parameterXCTRL as a modulation source has. Suppose you play the KS-32of a keyboard with a breath controller, and this wish forUse modulation tasks in the KS-32. You can now programset in which modulates the filter cutoff of the KS-32 by XCTRLwill. If you now "= 02 Xctrl" set the breath controller can nowmodulate the filter cutoff frequency, or any other parameteris modulated with XCTRL.The following controller numbers are recognized in the MIDI standard:

Number Controller Number Controller1 Modulation 64 Sustain Pedal2 Breath-controller 66 sostenuto pedal4 Pedal controller 70 patch Selects6 Data Entry knob 71 Timbre7 Volume 72 Release

10 Panorama

Although the range is here 01 to 95, most numbersyet no fixed function. You can for future expansion of theMIDI standards are used.

SM7

Controllers / Prog ChangeSystem • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 7

Controller = OFF

ProgChange = OFF

ControllerThis switch determines whether the KS-32 MIDI controller receives dataor not (pitch bend, modulation wheel, aftertouch, Volume, SustainPedal, etc.).

ProgChange - Program ChangeThis switch determines how the KS-32 MIDI Program Changeprocessed.

Page 66


• OFF-The KS-32 is receiving or transmitting any MIDI program changeor bank select commands.

• ON - The KS-32 sends and receives MIDI program change orBank Select messages.

Important : Program changes will be displayed with Numern 001-128displayed, although, as required by the MIDI specification as 000 toSent 127. The same applies to the bank select commands.

(If you want to know more about it, look into Part 8 - Presetsand Part 9 - Sequencer bases after).

ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change commandsThe way how to program change receive is something

3-14

complicated than in some other systems, because when the KS-32Number of immediately available sounds of the possible MIDIProgram change far exceeds. Therefore, the KS-32 uses the lastfour program change messages (124-127) to determine howto understand the following program changes are (the numbers refer toagain on the MIDI messages actually sent). The followingTable shows the effect of these four special commands:

for Program select the following programChange Currency: Change Currency:124 000..079 - INT Sounds125 000..079 - ROM Sounds126 000..079 - CARD-A-Sounds127 000..079 - CARD B sounds

These particular "control" commands always need only onceto be sent. All of the following program changes are geanusotreated again to follow such a command.

Note : Program Change 080 -099 choose always at the ready drum kit.

Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDIThere is a special command under the program change, the onlyMULTI mode is processed. With him are sound and effecttogether is called and in the respective track. If aProgram Change 123 on any of the selected MIDI channelsis received, takes the subsequent program changes thecorresponding effect of the sound simultaneously with, and replaces theprevious sequence or song effect. This is the only way how toautomatically effects can change in a song unless manuallyor by calling another sequence. This can be useful whento the KS-32 operates with an external sequencer.

Page 67


This special program change 123 has no effect on howother program changes are understood. If one of the "tax" -Program change numbers for the same sound used to send thisbetween the 123er and the actual exchange program.

Note : All KS-32 program changes are displayed 001-128 andprocessed, transmitted via MIDI, however, as 000 to 127.

SM8

System Excl / Song SelectSystem • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 8

System excl = ON

Song Select = OFF

System Excl - System Exclusive messagesThis switch determines whether the KS-32 system exclusive messagesis received or not. Is system excl = OFF, the KS-32 can notReceive SysEx messages. Nevertheless, always from the storageScreens from Sys-Ex are sent, no matter how the switch is (Morethis in the Appendix ).

Song SelectThis switch determines whether the KS-32 MIDI Song Select messagesis received. Is a Song Select = OFF, ignores the KS-32, these commands.Is a Song Select = ON, call such commands the corresponding sequencerMemory locations.

3-15

MIDI song Selects # 00-99 call the corresponding Sequence / SongMemories # 00-99 on. Conversely sends the KS-32 Song Select 00-99 when called the Sequence / Song memories # 00-99 on the devicebe.

Page 68


SM9

TrkName MIDI / MIDI loopSystem • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 9

MIDI TrkName = OFF

MIDI loop = OFF

MIDI Trk nameThis parameter determines whether or preset sequencer track with MIDIor * EXT * Status the sound name (as in LOCAL or BOTH) orShow the MIDI channel ("MIDI CHAN #").

• OFF - If the track to MIDI or * EXT * ( Edit Track, Screen 5 ), isdisplayed instead of the sound name for MIDI channel. This is helpful,when the CS-32 as a MIDI controller, master keyboard or sequencer forother MIDI equipment is used. It is immediately apparent that trace overMIDI is sent, and on what channel.

• ON - The sound track name will always appear regardless of which trackStatus is selected.

MIDI LoopHere it is determined whether the KS-32 incoming MIDI data as standardTo read data, or "looped" data from the MIDI Out of the KS-32.

If the KS-32 Keyboard Box as external sequencersuse, it is often not from that data from the MIDI Out of the KS-32back go to the MIDI In. This can lead to confusion,when it comes to MIDI feedback (z. B. It may be that aMIDI loop, the volume of a track on 0 draws). With the MIDILoop parameter can be the KS-32 even in such situations withoutUse problems.

• OFF - The KS-32 receives MIDI data normally. This is theFactory setting.

• ON - The KS-32 filters incoming MIDI data, it makes suchIgnored information that could lead to problems.

Set this parameter if the KS-32 in a MIDIUse loop.

3-16

Page 69

KS-32 user guide Part 4 - Effects

4 - 1

Part 4 - Effects

To understand the KS-32 effects ........................................... ............. 4 - 1Sound-Effekte...........................................................................................4 - 2Preset / Sequence / Song Effects ........................................... ...................... 4 - 2The programming of the effects .............................................. ............... 4 - 2The effects loops ................................................ ......................................... 4 - 3Mixture of effects ............................................... ................................ 4 - 4Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 5Sounds and presets ............................................... .................................... 4 - 5When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip? ........................... 4 - 5Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset Mode ............ 4 - 6Modulation effect ................................................ .................................... 4 - 6Ramps.......................................................................................................4 - 8Controller assignment of effects ............................................... ............... 4-9Effect parameters ............................................... ....................................... 4-9

CONCERT REVERB ................................................ ................... 4 - 108-VOICE.CHORUS ............................................. ......................... 4-11PHASE SHIFTER ................................................ ........................ 4-12CHORUS & REVERB ............................................... .................. 4 - 13Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2 ........................................... ............. 4 - 13PHASER + REVERB ............................................... ...................... 4-14ROTORY SPKR + VERB .............................................. ................ 4 - 16DIST + CHORUS + VERB ............................................. ................. 4-17CMPRSS + DIST + VERB ............................................. .................. 4-18

To understand the KS-32 effectsThe KS-32 has built a powerful effects processor, with aCan produce variety of different effects. And what elseis important: This feature is fully integrated into the synthesizer, notjust added. The flexible effects loops and the possibility ofReal-time control make the effects section of the KS-32 so dynamic .

The KS-32 is a specially developed ENSONIQ signal processor(ESP). this is a third generation of digitalOscillator chip (DOC III) and an external 16 bit digital to analogue converter,to ensure a high quality output.

The effects unit was on the other hand to complete the manyPerformance parameters of the KS-32 designed for many of the effectscertain parameters, by playing aids such as the modulationAftertouch, timbre control sources include controllable.

The effects are, of course, fully programmable, and can be used formodify each application. Effects are usually as part of aSounds stored. Moreover, also each sequence, each presetand each song its own effect program. Each type of effect is somewhathandled differently. Read more in the following part.

Page 70

Part 4 - Effects KS-32 user guide

Sound EffectsEvery sound in the KS-32 has its own effect program, with allassociated parameters. This effect is also active when all votes"Dry" are past the Effects section. Each time youSave a sound, save the settings of the

4-2

Effects unit.

The associated with the sound effect by pressing the Effects button( Bank 8 ) in the Edit Sound -mode displayed and edited. The correspondingParameters are exactly the section "Effect Parameters" in this partdiscussed.

Preset / Sequence / Song EffectsEach preset, each sequence and each song has its own effect, includingthe corresponding parameters. This effect is also active when allTestimonials "dry" past the Effects section (ie, whenall the tracks on the DRY Buss lie). The effect works on all sequencersTracks (or specific voices in the respective sound) obtained bythrough one of the effects loops.

The effect is with the preset, sequence or songstored. It remains unchanged until a new song or a newPreset or a new sequence is called or the effect manuallyis processed. A special program change command in the MULTI-Fashion can be used to load new effects in a sequence (seeDescription of the MIDI bank in Part 3 - System • MIDI) .

The sequence corresponding to the effect by pressing the Effects button( Bank 8 ) from the Edit Seq / Preset - display and edit mode outbe.

The programming of the effectsThe effects of the KS-32 are fully programmable. There isdifferent effect parameters for each effect type. On the first screentakes the effect selection. With the selection effect it has aSpecial feature: Its setting affects all subsequent screens whoseDesign and Display. Here is a new effect is selected, a is quiteLoading new effect preset in the ESP and the following things happen:

If a new effect is selected:• Loading a new effect preset, giving a brief interruption in the

Output brings with it.• be rebuilt parameters screens for the new effect.• are brought these parameters in a factory setting, as preset

Effect.

Page 71


Tip : If you select a new effect, you can choose between theChange individual effects without the unpleasant delay byJust quickly with the data entry knob to scroll through the table.When you reach the desired effect, wait aMoment, and the new effect is called.

The effects loopsThe output of each KS-32 voice (Voice) is in a stereo effectout. This FX combines all the signals to a stereo mixtogether, like a real mixing desk. Of the three paths of the KS-32lead two in the effects unit (FX 1 and FX 2), while the third way, theDry signal to the ESP passes (DRY). The assignment of the pathsoccurs in the output database. These settings can preset andSequencer track will be "overruled" by other assignments ( EditTrack, Screen 1 ).

Single effect

L

DRY

4-3

Vol PanL

RL

REffect 1

FX1

FX2

FX1

FX2

Voice output

TargetBus

Mainoutputs

The graph shows the effects loops and the mixture of signals at the output.Every voice runs through one of the three effect sends, passes through the effectapparatus or is passed to it. The thick lines indicate theStereo signal.

Page 72


Mixture of effectsAll effects their attitude of the two paths FX1 and FX2.They are below the effect name on the selection page, the firstScreen (Screen 0) the effect bank (Bank 8). The screen looks like this:

CONCERT REVERB

FX1 = 25 FX2 = 25

Selection effect

FX1 Mix FX2 Mix

If a single effect (such as reverb) is selected, both paths run overthis effect. If a double or multi-effects used runs FX1generally second by both or all effects, while FX 2 only by theEffect is running.

Multi Effects

PanL

RL

REffect 2

FX1

FX2

Mix1

Mix2

Voice output

TargetBus

Mainoutputs

DRY

Effect 1

Vol

If the selected effect a combined effect of more than one function(Such as chorus and reverb), FX1 and FX2 through the first to the secondEffect. The MIX control of FX2 controls the amount of the second effect for all

4-4

Sounds passing this way. FX1 mix determines the Vehältnis ofeffect from the first signal coming from the second effect andthe dry output. At extreme settings of these parameters, the two effects either in parallel or in seriesbe. (For some multi-effects there is even a separate MIX controlat the output of effect 1).

Page 73


4-5

Selects effectsThe first parameter of Effects - Bank used to select a particularEffect. Any change causes a completely new "effects package" withall parameters and their default values is called. Theeffects are available:

CONCERT REVERB large concert hall, very dense reverbHALL.REVERB Hall with transverse reflectionsROOM.REVERB Simulation of a small roomHOT CHAMBER Warm room with charakteritischer resonance8-VOICE CHORUS Eight voice chorus with complex

ModulationCHORUS & REVERB Four-Part Chorus, with kombinert HallFlanger + REVERB.1 Flanger combined with HallFlanger + REVERB.2 (variation combined with modulations)PHASE SHIFTER Stereo Phaser with selectable speed undTiefePHASER REVERB + Phaser combined with HallROTORY SPKR + VERB rotating speaker simulation with HallDIST + CHORUS + VERB Chorus with distortion and reverbCMPRSS + DIST + VERB Compressor, distortion and reverb. Strong for

Simulation of guitar amps withacoustic feedback

Sounds and presetsThe full effects setup, including the values of all parameters,is stored along with each sound. It will also togetherwith each sequence / each preset stored. The KS-32 does its bestwhen switching between effects. Nevertheless, there is a shortPause when effect programs are changed.

When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip?According to these rules decided by the KS-32, when to switch effectsare:

• If a new sound is selected, also changes the correspondingEffect.

• If a new sequence / a preset is selected, appearscorresponding Sequence / Preset effects.

• Whenever the sound mode to the sequences / presets modeis changed (by the Select Seq / Preset or Edit Seq / Preset buttonis pressed), the sequence effect is loaded. The same happens whenwill change from the sequences / presets mode to the sound mode(By the Select Sound or Sound Edit button presses).

• If a sound over the Replace-track sound function in aexisting preset / sequence is imported, the effect does not change.

• If you press a track button while the sound track Replace buttonheld , is the current sound from the sound mode istogether with its effect in the current preset or dieSequenz / theSong loaded.


4-6

• If you press the Make Default Preset - button, the current sound ofthe sound mode with its effect fetched in the Seq / preset edit buffer.

• If the MIDI a special program change message (# 123)MULTI mode is received, then the effect of the followingProgram change that the corresponding sound with its effect in thecurrent sequence is loaded.

• When storing the current sound or the preset / the sequence isthe corresponding effect with stored.

• When layered together a sound / track in a preset / sequence or songis, the effect changes not .

Whenever a new effect is loaded into the ESP-chip, a enstehtbrief interruption to the audio output so that belonging to the effectData can be loaded into the ESP. If an effect only throughthe setting of its parameters is different (but the same algorithmused), this interruption does not arise.

Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset ModeThe KS-32 is in preset / Sequencer mode, the effect of which cancurrently selected sequence / preset by pressing the Effects button ( Bank 8 )be processed.The Effects button calls the Effects on -Bank. You can then use theScreen buttons call up the different parameters of the bank.

Normally, the different voices in a sequence thefed three effects paths, as shown in the edit sound output -Bank. In theTrack Edit mode, the assignment within the individual soundsbe overruled.

The various Edit track - Output Bus settings are:• -DRY- send all comments to the dry way.• -FX1- sends FX2 votes to FX1; FX1 and stay DRY.• -FX2- sends FX1 votes to FX2; FX2 and stay DRY.• VOICE reserves the normal allocation unchanged.• CNTRL maintains the normal allocation and directs the controller

Information to this effect. This is the factoryDefault of the track after the election of a first sounds.

See Part 8 - Presets for more details.

Effect modulationFor all effects is an important control parameters in real timepossible. With the exception of the rotary speaker effect using all thesame modulation control screen (the modulation of the Rotary Speaker-Effect is discussed in more detail later).

Page 75


Intensity

Mod target

Modulate FX1-MIX

by MODPEDAL +00

Mod Source

4-7

The exact position of this screen depends on the selected effect, isbut always the last screen in the Effect Bank. The screen has threeParameters:

• Mod destination - Here it is determined which effect parametersto be modulated. Which can be modulated, depends on theeach effect from.

• Source Mod - Here the modulation source is determined.• Mod Amount - This is where the strength of the modulation is set.

The following modulation sources are influencing the effects ofAvailable:

Modulation source Is modulated byKEYBOARD Note the number of the last pressed keyVELOCITY the average velocityPRESSURE aftertouchPITCHWHL the value of the pitch wheelModWheel the value of the modulation wheelMODPEDAL the value of the expression pedalXCONTROL the value of the selectable MIDI controllerhow eg a Breath ControllerSUS PEDAL pressing the sustain pedalTimbral the value of the parameter timbral this

Tracks when it is on CONTROL (see below)RAMPS 1-6 one of the six envelope structuresOFF nothing

Page 76


RampsSix of the possible modulation sources are called ramps. These arehüllkurvenähnliche structures which addressed the parameterModulate time level of time, depending on the selected level. There are alsoa release time that is active after releasing the button. The illustrationbelow shows the various Ramps:

Released all notes

0 1 40 1 4Attack Time in seconds Release time in seconds

.1 .1

Ramp 1Pressed any key

Released all notes


.1 .1


Released all notesRamp 3

Pressed any key

4-8


.1 .1

Released all notes


.1 .1


Page 77


Released all notes


.1 .1


Released all notes


.1 .1


Controller assignment of effectsWith effects real-time control, it is sometimes desirable todecide on which track are taken over the data controllerto. This applies especially to use in MULTI mode. If there is moreas a track on CNTRL, there may be a "controller chaos." Standsa track to VOICE, the assignments are copied withoutController influence the effect (as AFTERTOUCH, timbralController or ModWheel etc.).

Effect parametersAll effect parameters are located in the Effects -Bank ( Bank 8 ) in the SoundEdit mode and the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. Each of the types of effects hasvarious screens with individual parameters belong.Some parameters appear again and again, while others are specific tocertain effects are related. The first screen is at all effectsakin. The following then vary more or less. They contain thespecific parameters.

Each effect has a mix FX1 and FX2 a mix parameters, plusdifferent individual parameters. All are programmable and providefor maximum flexibility in the processing of the effects.

4-9

Page 78


4 - 10

Simple effects - Reverb

CONCERT REVERB; HALL REVERB; ROOM REVERB; WARMCHAMBER

The effects in this category produce a single, high-resolutionStereo effect such. B. Hall studio quality or kompexen Chorus. TheFX1 and FX2 paths can be used to various mixturesto achieve the same effect.CONCERT REVERB is a concert hall, good for long release times.HALL REVERB is a Hall with intersecting reflections.ROOM REVERB is dieSimulation a room.WARM-CHAMBER is a warm room reverb with characteristicResonance.

The parameters for these four effects algorithms are:

Decay TimeArea: 0 to 99This is the time it takes for the Hall, up to a very low level(-60 DB) subside after stayed the input signal.

DiffusionArea: 00 to 99This parameter determines whether the individual reflections as a seriesRepetitions (low values) or as a diffuse mixture (high values). occur

Detune rateArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the LFO speed for the detuning,entering through the Hall. This detuning creates a naturalslight pitch shift the signal.

Detune DepthArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the amount of detuning. Low valuesproduce a metallic sound. For some sounds you need verylow values.

HF Damping - High-frequency attenuationArea: 0 to 99The HF Damping parameter controls the amount of treble attenuation of theThe reverb sound. As with natural reverberation chambers, swallows theMeans high frequencies. The higher the value, the stronger theHeight loss.

Page 79


RF Bandwidth - High BandwidthArea: 00 to 99The RF bandwidth parameter acts as a low pass filter on the

4-11

Hall signal and controls high frequencies, the signal from the original in the Hallflows. The higher the value, the more highs pass through the Hall.

Low Frequency Decay (not HOT CHAMBER)Area: -99 To +99This parameter changes the Decay low frequencies in the Hall.

Individual effects - modulation effects

8-VOICE.CHORUSThis is a complex stereo chorus with eight different voices anddifferently adjusted LFO's.

Chorus RateArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the eight speeds at which the Decel-be modulated delay times of the chorus.

Chorus DepthArea: 00 to 99Here the amount of modulation is determined.

Chorus CenterArea: 00 to 99This parameter determines the delay middle of the chorus. With thisParameters can be changed, the tonal character.

FeedbackArea: -99 To +99This parameter controls the intensity of the positive or negativeFeedback (feedback) on the chorus.

Page 80


PHASE SHIFTERA 12-pin stereo phaser with controllable speed and intensity,in the style of the old phaser effect devices.

Phaser rateArea: 00 to 99Sets the modulation speed.

Phaser DepthArea: 00 to 99Sets the amount of modulation.

Phaser CenterArea: 00 to 99Determines the average modulation. A value of "50" sets theCenter right in the middle. Then the effect is the strongest.

FeedbackArea: -99 To +99Determines the amount of feedback on the effect.

4-12

Stereo Cross FeedbackArea: -99 To +99Supplies the signal to the input of the other side and produceswhile a stereo feedback effect.

Warning : Be careful when setting this parameter! Some feedbackCombinations can produce loud sine waves and earsSpeakers may be harmful. Always start with lowValues and increase the amount slowly.

Phaser LevelArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the amount of modulation in relation toOverall signal. Usually this should always stand on 99.

Invert InputArea: ON / OFFHere, the input signal can be inverted before returning it to theIs mixed effect signal. Reverts the effect in practice.

Page 81


Multi-effectsThe remaining effects usually have a standard Hall on FX2,combined with another effect on FX1. With the FX1 Mix parameterit can be determined how much of the FX1 effect is to run through the Hall.The decay of the reverb always appear on the first screen forthese multi-effects.

CHORUS & REVERBA combination of a four-part chorus and reverb. Sounds byRun FX1, have both effects, sounds FX2 have only the Hall.

Decay TimeHF Damping - High Frequency DampingSee detailed explanation under Hall in the single-effect group.

Chorus RateRange: 00 to 99This parameter controls the speed of the modulation.

Chorus DepthRange: 00 to 99This parameter controls the amount of modulation.

Chorus CenterRange: 00 to 99This parameter determines the delay middle of the chorus. With thisParameters can be changed, the tonal character.

FeedbackRange: -99 to +99This parameter controls the amount of feedback (feedback) onthe chorus.

Chorus LevelRange: 00 to 99Determines the mixing ratio between original and effect signal.

4-13

Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2Flanger 1 is a Chorus with only one LFO. Flanger 2 has twoLFOs with various speeds. FX1 laüft over both effects,FX2 only through the Hall.

Decay TimeHF Damping - High Frequency Dampingso

Flange rateRange: 00 to 99Controls the speed of the Flanger effect.

Page 82


4-14

Flange DepthArea: 00 to 99Controls the intensity of the Flanger effect.

Flange CenterArea: 00 to 99Determines the average for the modulation.

FeedbackArea: -99 To +99Adjusts the amount of feedback in the Flanger effect. Plus or minusdetermines the polarity of the effect.

Flange LevelArea: 00 to 99Adjusts the overall intensity of the effect and should be set to 99 toTo achieve maximum effect.

Invert InputRange: ON / OFFHere, the input signal can be inverted before returning it to theIs mixed effect signal. Reverts the effect in practice.

PHASER REVERB +12-pin Phaser Hall. FX1 has two effects, only the FX2 Hall.


Phaser rateArea: 00 to 99Determines the phaser speed.

Phaser DepthArea: 00 to 99Determines the intensity of the phaser.

Phaser CenterArea: 00 to 99Determines the average for the modulation.

FeedbackArea: -99 To +99Feedback Contribution to phaser effect.

Phaser LevelArea: 00 to 99Determines the overall level of the effect. Should normally be 99. are


4-15

Invert InputArea: ON / OFFInverts the input signal before the phaser and reversing the effect soto.

Page 84


ROTORY SPKR + VERBThe classic organ effect, here in combination with Hall. FX1 has bothEffects, only the FX2 Hall.


Slow speedRange: 00 to 99Determines the speed in the slow setting ("slow").

4-16

Fast SpeedRange: 00 to 99Determines the speed in the fast setting ("fast").

Rotor CenterRange: 00 to 99Determines the center acts from which the LFO.

Rotor DepthRange: 00 to 99Determines the intensity of the LFO.

Speed ModeHere is the type of switching between the two speedsdetermined.• CONTIN - (Continuous) This setting controls the

Modulation source directly the speed.• SWITCH - Selects the modulation source acts as a switch with the

Effect is turned up or down. Even the typical delayis imitated.

• TOGGLE - Any movement of the modulation source triggers a switchthe speed of, from slow to fast, from fast toslowly. Good for use with foot pedals.

ModSrc - Modulation SourceSets the modulation source fixed for the rotary speaker effect. Theavailable sources are the same as in the list at the beginning ofChapter.

Note: If a voice or a track is assigned to FX1, have the Edit Sound -Voice Pan and Edit Track - Track Pan parameter no audible effecton the sound. The rotor speaker effect lifts all pan settingson.

Page 85


DIST + CHORUS + VERBChorus with distortion and reverb. FX1 sounds have chorus and reverb,have either with or without distortion (see diagram), FX2 Soundsonly the Hall.

DIST + CHORUS + REVERB Signal

Dist L

RReverb

FX1On The Right

FX2

Mix1

Mix2Voice output

TargetBus

MainOutputs

ChorusVol Pan

FX1On The Left

Decay Timeso

Distortion LevelArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the output level of the distortion effect. TheInput level is determined by the volume and pan position of theeach voice set.

Chorus Rate

4-17

Area: 00 to 99Controls the speed of the chorus.

Chorus DepthArea: 00 to 99Controls the depth of the chorus.

Chorus CenterArea: 00 to 99Controls the delay time of the chorus.

FeedbackArea: -99 To +99Feedback intensity. +/- Determines the polarity of the feedback.

Chorus LevelArea: 00 to 99Determines the ratio of original and effect signal.

Page 86


CMPRSS + DIST + VERBA trippy guitar effect, not only with Compressor, Distortion, andHall, but also with flanger and equalizer. FX1 sounds through allEffects, FX2 sounds only the Hall.

CMPRSS + DIST + REVB Signal

CompL

R

FX2

MainOutputs

EQDistortFlangeFX1

Reverb to Cmprss FeedbackDRY

Reverb

Mix1

Mix2


Flange rateArea: 00 to 99Controls the flanger speed. In 00 of the flanger is turned off.

CompressionArea: 00 to 99This parameter controls the starting point of the compressor. If theInput from, the compressor raises the level again, whatever theFeedback increased. The normal compression is "72".

Distortion Level - (In and Out)These two parameters determine input and output levels for theDistortion effect. The range of both parameters is 00-11,based on the Tufnel theorem, which states that "10" is not loudis enough, which is why you can go to "11" here.

Reverb to Cmprss FeedbackArea: -99 To +99This parameter controls the feedback of the output signal behind theHall on the compressor input. The sign determines the polaritythe feedback.

4-18

Note : Since the feedback signal is obtained from FX1, it is only effective if theFX1 MIx is actually turned up. Since the feedback signal after theIs tapped Hall, which is indeed reached via FX2, mustlogically FX2 signals included in the feedback loop.

Page 87


4-19

Hipass cutoffArea: 00 to 99This parameter filters out low frequencies behind the distortion. Eachhigher the value, the less low frequencies pass through.

LOPASS cutoffArea: 00 to 99This parameter filters out high frequencies behind the distortion. Eachhigher the value, the less high frequencies to pass.

Page 88Page 89

KS-32 user guide Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

5 - 1

What is a sound? .................................................. ................................. 5 - 1Voices and consistency ............................................... ......................... 5 - 1Compare - About the Compare button / LED ......................................... .... 5-2The Edit-Buffer.........................................................................................5 - 2How to save new sounds ............................................. .................. 5 - 3How to copy sounds .............................................. ............................ 5 - 4

What is a sound?The sounds of the KS-32 can be divided into two categories. Once theDefault sounds , consisting of three voices (voices) and an effect ,and secondly, the drum sounds from the 17 voices and effectexist. Drum sounds have some other program parameters, butbut much more votes.

Standard sounds and drum sounds each have their ownProgramming rules. More on this in Part 6 and 7 . In this part it ismore to the general principles of both sound classes.

Voices and voicesWhen we speak of the number of votes a single KS-32 sounds sohas nothing to do with the voices (polyphony, so "you can so-and-somany tones play ") do. It is rather a question of the number ofVoices that make up a played note.

The KS-32 has a total of 32 votes, the dynamic between thedifferent sounds are distributed. How many votes there for aindividual sound consumed depends on two factors:

1) The number of voices available on the Select Voice Page ON( Wave Bank, Screen 0 ).

2) Whether the keyboard ( Output Bank, Screen 1 ) or dynamic zones( Output Bank, Screen 3 ) of the voices overlap or not.

Many sounds come with one voice per key off in this caseyou can play 32 tones before the KS-32 somewhere a voice"Steals". Sounds that use two voices are still 16 voicesplayable. Sounds with three voices corresponding to 10 voices. Up to threeVoices can be used in a standard sound.

Drum sounds are basically unanimously, that is, they use aVoice per key.

So Memorize: The KS-32 has a dynamic Stimmenzuwei-solution - there are many ways to increase the number of votes and theTo avoid occurrence of "voice stealing".

Page 90

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming KS-32 user guide

For example:

• When a voice died away (be it because the end of the shafthas been reached, or because the envelope was completely run throughis) she is back for a new tone available without anew voice to must be "stolen". More on this in Part 6 .

• You can also determine if a voice low, medium,or to have high priority. So you can use the voice allocationmake yourself. More on this in the section " Output Bank "in part. 6

Compare - About the Compare button / LEDOnce you have changed any sound parameters, the LED startson the Edit Sound flashing button. It flashes to other oneSelect Sound, or save the modified sound. This is aautomatic reminder that a sound has been changed.

In order to hear the original, unchanged, simply press theCompare button. The Edit Sound LED stops flashing, and listen to

5 - 2

the original sound. The display also appear again the ancientParameters. Press Compare again, you will hear youredited version of the sound.

The Edit BufferYou can also change a sound without losing the original because themodified version in a special buffer, called EditBuffer is preserved. Every time you change a parameter,is transferred into the edit buffer this sound. What was there before, isdeleted. There is always room for a sound - which previously in the bufferwas, is gone.

If the Compare button press, you switch between the soundin the edit buffer and its original in the main memory of the KS-32. TheSound in the Edit Buffer we call general Edit Sound .

You can press the Compare button at this Edit Soundreturn, even if you have already played other sounds,as long as you change any parameters. Otherwise, the sound of the EditBuffer.

The rule of thumb is: The sound can be heard, the sound is the oneedited.

If you like the newly created sound, you should rename itand stored elsewhere. This procedure is described in "How tonew sounds stores "explained in this section.

Page 91

KS-32 user guide Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

How to cancel editsIf you do not like the outcome of your art of programming:Press the compare button so that the Edit Sound indicator lights solidlights up. Now you can start all over again. You losethe sound where you have worked before.

How to save new soundsAfter you have made a new sound, or an existinghave edited the now rather suits your taste, you need Himsave somewhere, so he also still available later. NewSounds can be in one of the 80 internal memories of the KS-32be stored. Here's how:

1) Make sure that the Edit Sound LED flashes. If not,press the Compare button. Then you hear the edit buffer.

2) Press Enter • Save . Then do the KS-32 that you with the soundare done, and now want to save. The display shows: "Save Sound<SOUND NAME>? "The name of the sound with which youhave begun to edit.

3) Use the cursor keys to select a max. 16-character name for youra new sound. The left / right cursor keys to select the place,the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys to select the letter or symbol.(With the data entry knob all the way down you get aSpace. By the way, looks a sound name with dot, comma and dashclearer in the display.)

4) Press Enter • Save .

5) Search with the Bank and screen buttons to select a location forthe new sound. The display shows the name of the currentSounds in memory.

Find a sound that you no longer need, or

5 - 3

Did you somehow never really fallen. You can thank theCompare - Compare button, which you like best.

6) Do you have a preset location is found just press yetEnter • Save . The display will briefly "SAVED" before the display againchanges to the last parameter.

Tip : Do you want to perpetuate the altered sound in its original place, dothis with a traditional double click on the Enter • Save- button. In theDisplay will show "SAVED", and then it happened.

Page 92

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming KS-32 user guide

How to copy soundsSometimes it happens that a sound just by aMemory to be copied to another. Maybe you wantTogether their ten most important sounds on a bench.

• Select the sound to be copied to.• Press Enter • Save . The display shows:

Replace edit

sound?

• Confirm with Up • Yes . The selected sound is now in the edit buffer.Now you can as described above, the sound elsewherestore.

5 - 4

Page 93

KS-32 user guide Part 6 - standard sound programming

6 - 1

Part 6 - standard sound programming

• This part covers all the functions independently in a default sound for eachsingle voice can be edited.

KS-32 standard sound structure .......................................... ..................... 6 - 2Modulators ................................................. ............................................ 6 - 3

About modulation ................................................ ............................. 6 - 3Selecting a modulator ............................................... ................ 6 - 3Modulation Amount - yes or no modulation ............................. 6 - 4Modulation sources ................................................. ....................... 6 - 4

The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 6 - 8Wave-Bank...............................................................................................6 - 8

Select VOICE / Voice Status ............................................. ............... 6 - 9Wave-class ............................................... .................................... 6 - 10Individual Waves ............................................... ........................... 6-12Delay time ............................................... ...................................... 6-13Home Index ............................................... ..................................... 6-13Loop Length ............................................... .................................. 6 - 14Voice Restrike Decay Time ........................................... .............. 6 - 14Change sound mode ............................................. ....................... 6 - 14

Pitch Bank ............................................... ............................................... 6 - 15Oct.................................................................................................6 - 15Env1 ................................................. ............................................. 6 - 15Mod Source ............................................... ................................... 6-16Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................ 6-16Glide ................................................. ............................................ 6-16

ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelope ............. 6-18Levl - Level ............................................... ................................. 6-19Time ................................................. ............................................. 6-20Levv - Dynamic Level Control .......................................... 6-21Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2) ......................................... ............. 6-22MODE (AMP) - Parts trigger .......................................... ..6 - 22KeyboardTrk - keyboard control .............................................. 6 - 23Select Defaults ............................................... ............................... 6-24

The LFO Bank .............................................. .......................................... 6-25LFO speed ............................................... ..................................... 6-25Noise-rate ............................................... ..................................... 6-25Level - Level LFO .............................................. ........................ 6-26Wave ................................................. ............................................ 6-26

The filter bank .............................................. ......................................... 6-28Filter1 - Filter-1 mode ........................................... .................... 6-28Filter configurations ............................................... ................... 6-29FC1 cutoff - Filter-1 cutoff frequency ...................................... 6 - 30FC1 keyboard ............................................... ............................... 6-30Mod Sourc ............................................... ..................................... 6-30FC2 cutoff - Filter-2 cutoff frequency ...................................... 6 - 31FC2 keyboard ............................................... ............................... 6-31

The Env2 and amp benches ............................................ ......................... 6-31The output Bank .............................................. ...................................... 6-32

Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ........... 6-32Mod Source - Volume modulator ......................................... 6 - 32KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone) ............... 6-33Output bus ............................................... ..................................... 6-33Pan - Pan position ............................................... ................ 6-34

Page 94

Part 6 - standard sound programming KS-32 user guide

KS-32 standard sound structureEach of the three parts of a standard sound consists of:• a digital oscillator, one of 167 waveforms from the KS-32

Wellenformstpeicher happening• Two multi-mode digital filters• an LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)• three complex envelopes for volume, pitch and filter etc.• a versatile modulation matrix with 15 possible

6-2

Modulation sources.

The diagram shows the structure of KS-32 voice.

Velocity curveKeyboard trackingVelocity control of Attack and LevelEnvelope Mode (Normal / finish / repeat)

LevelDelay

TRIANGLESINE

SINE / TRIPOS / SINEPOS / TRISAWTOOTHSQUARE

ENV 1 ENV 2

Filter Type:

Env 1ModOffice

OctaveSemitone

PitchModOffice

F1ModOffice

VolumeMod Office

Cutoff

KbdOffice

Env 2Office

Cutoff

DigitalOscillator

Digital Filters

PanPosition

VoiceOutputVolume(AMP amt.)

LFOOffice

L

R

KbdOffice

Env 2Office

LFO Wave

F1 F2

F2:F1:

Amplifier

LFO

Finetune

Wave

Delay

Modulation sourcesLFOENV 1ENV 2AMPNoise1Noise2VELOCKEYBD

TimbralPEDALPITCHWHEELWHL + PRPRESSRMAX ONXCTRL

Levels: Attack, Peak, Break, sustainEnvelope parameters

QUIKRISECONVEXLINEARCONCAVE

Velocity curves

VolumeMod Source

Noise SrcRate

NoiseSource

Rate

BendRange

WaveMod

Boost

KS-32Parts Construction

F1Mod Source

LFOFashion

LFO LevelMod Source

PitchMod Source

AMP

Fc1 Mod-> F c2

ON OFF

Times: Attack, Decay1 / 2, Release

Noise1Noise2

Page 95


Modulators

About modulationSomething modulating means nothing more than to change its value.Within a voice of the KS-32 sound programming starts by, that we for the pitch parameter, tone, and volumeSet Default to this then most diverse in style andWay to modulate the sound will be dynamic and alive.

Suppose you turn your stereo system and turn theVolume to halfway. Then we could the manual volumeSetting call. Now imagine, turn the volumecontroller alternately up and down again, so that the volume alwaysand down to and decreases again. Then you could in other words,say you modulate the volume of your system. Would you recommend theTake treble controls, a tone modulation would be the result.

Many parameters of the KS-32 is modulated in a similar way(Though less random). There are 16 different modulation sources.Each can independently a certain sound parameters of the KS-32be assigned, including some interesting effect parameters.

Selecting a modulatorOn the screens on which a modulation source can be selectedcan, the display shows "Mod = _________" (short for Modulation

6-3

can, the display shows "Mod = _________" (short for ModulationSource). With the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursorthe modulation source is now selected.

Take for example the pitch modulation screen, where the pitcha voice can be modulated. Press Edit sound to theSound Edit Mode to come. Then press the Pitch button ( Bank 1)and 1 screen . In addition to Envelope 1 (Envelope 1) and the LFO, thealways available, yet an additional modulator forPitch can be selected:

Env1 = -99 = -99 LFO

Mod LFO * +99

Modulation source Intensity modulation

Page 96


Modulation Amount - Modulation: Yes or NoAs seen above, the value is to the right of the modulation sourceits intensity modulation on. This determines how much theModulator is to act on the selected parameter.

Select the parameter "LFO = XX.". Now imagine the Data-Entry control the value. Which can be positive or negative. The+00 Value has the same effect as if the modulator would be switched off.

Tip : For the modulation intensity, as for all parameters, with a meanof +00, there is a simple action to achieve this value.If you have selected the value, press the Down • No cursor ,then the Up • Yes-cursor to it, and release both at the same time. Thenthe value automatically jumps to +00.

Modulation sourcesThese are the 16 different modulation sources of KS-32:

• LFO - Low Frequency Oscillator • timbral - Timbre knob• ENV 1 - Envelope 1 • PEDAL - foot pedal• ENV 2 - Envelope 2 • PITCH - Pitch bend wheel• AMP - Envelope 3 • WHEEL - Modulation• NOISE 1 - 1 noise generator • WHL + PR - Mod Wheel &.

Aftertouch• NOISE 2 - Noise Generator 2 • PRESSR - Aftertouch• VELOC - Velocity • MAX ON - Full modulation• KEYBD - keyboard - control • XCTRL - Remote Controller

(MIDI)

LFO - Low Frequency OscillatorThe low-frequency oscillator generates oscillations with very lowFrequency below the threshold of hearing with which vibrato, tremolo, andcan produce many other effects - depending on the selected waveform (itare 7 different). A detailed description of the LFO followscorresponding section of this part.

ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3)The KS-32 complex has three envelopes. With envelopetime-dependent modulation of volume, pitch or timbregenerated.• ENV-1 is fixed to the pitch of the voice, but can also

6-4

Elsewhere be used.• ENV-2 is firmly connected to the filter of the voice, but can also

Elsewhere be used.• AMP is a special case. The AMP Envelope always controls the volume

or amplitude and can only be used there.

A detailed treatment of the envelopes of the KS-32 later in thisPart.

Page 97


6 - 5

NOISE 1 - Rasterized noise generatorThe noise generator generates a random control voltage. On theDefined pitch, extreme "computer typical" can generate effectsbe. With slight modulation (around +02 to + 04) one gets subtleChanges in pitch that enhances the sound more lively.

Noise rate

0

+100

-100

NOISE 1

NOISE 2 - Soft Noise GeneratorThis second noise generator uses the same scheme as thefirst, only with a smoothed waveform. The generated on the pitchbased, "siren-like" effects. The figure shows the differencesbetween the two noise generators.

Noise rate

0

+100

-100

NOISE 2

VELOC - VelocityThe velocity (velocity) is the strength, pressed a button with thewill. Select VELOC as a modulator, you can by the parametercontrol your playing strength. (If only positive values)

Page 98


6 - 6

KEYBD - keyboard voltageHere, the position is used on the keyboard as a modulation source.The range of values over the entire MIDI keyboard range:

+100

+50

0

-50

-100

88-key piano keyboardMIDI note numbers 0-127

KS-32 keyboard

As the figure shows, the modulator KEYBD can have both positive andhave negative values. Starting from middle C (C4, MIDINote number # 60) of the modulated parameter is lowered downand lifted up. With negative modulation intensity is theexactly the opposite.

Timbral - Timbre controlThis is again a ENSONIQ -Spezialität: can timbral as anyother modulator can be used anywhere. The timbre parameters underEdit Track, Screen 8 regulates the timbral intensity. With timbral, thecorresponding value on the data entry control are controlled. Good forLive Peformance.

PEDAL - voltage control foot pedalHere, the additional CVP-1 foot pedal is used as a modulator. TheEffect is the same as in the modulation wheel. It can be used anywherebe. Remember, though, that the pedal only as a modulatorworks when under System • MIDI, Screen 3 for the pedal"Pedal = Mod # 4." Has been eigestellt. Otherwise, the pedal controls only theVolume. More on this in Part 3 - System • MIDI settings.

PITCH - Pitch bend wheelHere, the pitch bend wheel is addressed. This wheel can next to thePitch shift also carry out other functions as a modulator.Does it, for example, the filter cutoff frequency, the sound isbrighter when the wheel is moved upward, or even softer whenit rotates downward (with a negative index, it acts vice versa).

Page 99


WHEEL - The ModulationThe Modulation left of the keyboard can be anywhere as a modulatoruse. To use it to control the vibrato, it must be the LFObe associated with the modulation intensity � must be 0. TheEffect is positive. The effect is stronger when the wheel by itselfmove away. With inverted index it works the other way around.

WHL + PR - Modulation and aftertouchThis double modulation source allows the simultaneous modulatingwith modulation wheel and aftertouch.

PRESSR - AftertouchAftertouch a modulator that certain parameters is by the strength ofControl button is pressed after the attack.

6-7

If you play on the keyboard of the KS-32, press the keysHold, again vigorously after to trigger the effect.

After Touch is available in two versions-Poly-Key ™ as ENSONIQ -Spe-zialität (polyphonic aftertouch) acting on each button independently, andChannel Aftertouch (monophonic aftertouch), held for allKeys simultaneously acts. The KS-32 can both types via MIDIreceive and process. The own keyboard sends channel aftertouch.

Remember that all sounds are programmed only in accordance withmust be able to receive aftertouch. Has no aftertouchEffect is simply not been allocated accordingly.

Aftertouch as a modulator there are only positive values, because innegative values, the level would verrringert.

MAX ON - Full modulationMAX ON sets the full modulation intensity for the correspondingParameters. This can be useful for example in drum sounds toregardless of the dynamics always have full volume. MAXON can be used positively or negatively, depending on the programmedIntensity.

XCTRL - Remote Controller (via MIDI)An external controller such. As a breath controller, the MIDI em-is pfangen, can also be used to modulate the KS-32.In the System • MIDI mode is to the appropriate controller numberset.

Page 100


You must KS-32 does not play by a different keyboard to enterCome to benefit from a Breath Controller (Breath);1) Vebinden the MIDI Out of the instrument with the in the KS-32;2) Make sure that both controllers are active

( System • MIDI, Screen 7 );3) Select the breath controller as an external controller of the KS-32

(XCTRL = 02, and System • MIDI, Screen 7 ).4) Select the LFO modulator or filter cutoff, etc. XCTRL so

as appropriate section of the manual.5) Play the sound of the KS-32 keyboard while in the

Breath Controller blow. The modulation has the same effect as if youplay on the external instrument.

The Sound Edit modeWhenever you want to change a sound, you have the KS-32first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done by selecting the EditSound button. Then you can adjust the sound according to your parametersChange ideas.

The Sound Edit mode parameters are eight banks distributed. EachBank contains a series of screens , which in turn one or moreCan contain parameters. Each screen in the Sound Edit mode has atwo-digit Screen address .

Note: The Wave Bank Screen addresses change depending on theWaveform class and the specific parameters in each class. Moreabout Screen addresses in Part 2 - Overview.

Wave BankEvery voice (Voice) KS-32 is one of 168 waveforms from hisMemory again. These waves are the "raw material" from which a sound

6-8

is established. In the Wave -Bank can select which of Wavethe currently selected voice to be played. In addition, manyPlayback parameters can be changed for this wave.

00 Select Voice / Voice StatusWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen 0th

Voice status values

Select Voice: ONE

ON ON ON

Select Voice

Page 101


The first screen of the Wave Bank has three functions: whether one or allVoices are to be edited, which is edited (if only onebeen selected) and the respective playback status.

Select VoiceThis parameter determines whether one or all voices of a sound editingshould be.• ONE - A single voice is edited. What that determines the

Voice status parameter, which will be described below.• ALL - All Voices in a sound are active and at the same time

edited. ALL is selected, the KS-32 is located in the Group Edit mode .Parameter changes then automatically act for all the voices. When youthe Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys for data entry at Select-VOICE = ALL use the values of various voices changerelative to each other, instead of the value shown in the display.

Voice StatusThe three values at the bottom of the oscillator screen is called generalVoice status parameters. The values correspond to the three voices of KS32 sounds. The parameter is used to determine which voicesto be edited (if Select Voice is set to ONE) and whichPlayback status of each voice.

One Voice is selected, this parameter for editing. Thenflashes the voice status parameters. From that moment on, any actsEdit this voice.

There are three status options for each voice:

• OFF - The selected voice is muted and does not decay with.• ON - The Voice is on and is played.• SOLO - The Voice is on, while all others are muted,

so you can listen to parameter changes better.

Note : The Voice, the status value is flashing, the Voice for editingis selected.

6-9

Page 102


6 - 10

01 Wave Class / Individual WaveWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 1

STRING ENSEMBLE

Wave = STRING WAVE

Waveform-class

Single waveform

Wave ClassThis parameter determines the waveform class, intended for aVoice is used. Have you selected this parameter, you can usethe Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to quicklyscroll through the different waveform types. Then you go onthe waveform name to the exact wave within the classpick.

Each time the class is changed Wave appear the respective firstWave in the display and all associated wave Bank, Screen 3 parametersbe changed accordingly.

The KS-32 distinguishes between 13 different categories, orWave - Classes :

These classes include samples of acoustic and electronicSounds that serve as the basis for many realistic sounds. If necessary,these waves multisamples (of different stand points of Tonumfan-ges resampled) for an authentic reproduction of the original sound.• STRING-WAVE -samples of stringed instruments - strings, pianos,

Guitars etc.• BRASS-WAVE - Samples of wind instruments - Horn, Saxophone, etc.• BASS WAVE - A selection of bass sounds - electric bass, contrabass,

Synth basses, etc.• BREATH WAVE - flute and choir samples with plenty of breath.• TUNED PERC - Here you will find a lot of sounds, all with percussive loops

(Ie, they sound as long as a key is pressed.)• PERCUSSION - This class contains ungeloopte (short) percussion

Sounds• DRUM-WAVE - Single drum sounds for new drum kits. Read more

in part. 6• 16-BIT PIANO - Samples of pianos and piano attacks in 16-bit

Resolution.

Page 103


• EXPANSION - A wide range of sounds - strings,Horns, bass, Breath, Percussion, Pianos, etc.

The next four classes contain a lot of sampled andalgorithmically generated Waves with more synth character:

6-11

• WAVE FORM - A waveform is a simple waveform with onlya period which is always repeated. The KS-32 has bothsampled as synthetic waveforms. With sawtooth and squarecan all the classic analog sounds can be realized.

• inharmonic - inharmonic loops are the very Waveformssimilarly, except that they consist of several periods, andmay contain inharmonic overtones.

• TRANSWAVE - Trans-Wave ™ is a special group of waves, theit only ENSONIQ are. Each Transwave consists of many individualWaveforms with different spectrum, to form a chainhave been linked. With different parameters can bedetermine from where and how this wavetable is to be played, what theSound makes very much alive.

• MULTI-WAVE - Contains only a single waveform, but fromcomposed all of the first 10 Waves waveform classes of the KS-32is. Starting with an arbitrary wave, any desired numberplay of waves, forward or backward. This means thatEffects and "Jam Loops" possible. A loop length of 001 playsa single waveform from, whereas a loop length of 126 allWaveforms representing. The default is 000, which is also allWaveforms correspond.

Page 104


Individual WavesHere the actual wave is selected. Flashes of these parameters canwith the data entry control to select from the waves of this class.With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor the class can be changed.Below you can see a complete list of all 167 KS-32 waveforms.The Wave-class is shown in bold above.

PERCUSSION:WOODEN HITWOODBLOCKTEMPLE BLOCKCLAVESTIMBALEBONGOSAGOGO-BELLCOWBELLTAMBOURINEFINGERSNAPSCLAPSDINKY HITTOY HAMMERSLINKY POPMUSICIAN'S TAPESTEAM DRUMBIG BLASTSPRAY CAN

WAVEFORM:ORGAN VARIATION1ORGAN VARIATION2ORGAN VARIATION3ORGAN VARIATION4SAWTOOTHSQUARESINETRIANGLE1 + 2 HARMONICS2 HARMONIC SAWDIGITAL PNO GRITDIGITAL PNO TINEBUBBAWAVECLAVINETCLAV VARIATIONWOODWINDWWIND VARIATIONPIPE ORGAN

BRASS WAVE:BRASS ENSEMBLETRUMPET SOLOTRUMP VARIATION

STRING WAVE:STRING ENSEMBLEPIZZICATO STRINGGRAND PIANOPIANO VARIATIONDIGITAL PIANOCLAVINET PIANOACOUSTIC GUITARGTR VARIATION 1GTR VARIATION 2GUITAR-HARMONICELECTRIC GUITARPLUCKED GUITARCHUKKA GUITAR

16BIT PIANO:16 BIT PIANO16 BIT PIANO HI16 BIT PIANO-LOTHUDEXPANSION:VIOLA SECTSOLO VIOLINNYLON GUITARHARPSHAMIZENELEC PIANO 1ELEC PIANO 2PERC ORGANTRUMPET MUTESOPRANO SAXACCORDIANFRETLES BASSSLAP BASSSYNTH BASS 3

6-12

BASS WAVE:PICKED BASSTHUMB POP BASSPLUCKED BASSACOUSTIC BASSSYNTH BASS 1SYNTH BASS 2

SPRAY CANMETALLIC DINKVOCAL PERCUSSIONANVIL-HITSYNTH THUMP

PIPE ORGANBRASS ORGANVOCAL BELLSYNTH BELLCLARINET

Inharmonic:TRIANGLE LOOPANVIL LOOPCLUSTER LOOPTUBULAR LOOPNOISE LOOP

DRUM WAVE:DYNAMIC KICKGATED KICKROOM KICKELECTRIC KICKTIGHT KICKTHUMP KICKTHUMP SNARESYNTH SNAREROOM SNAREBRUSHED SNARERIMSHOT SNARESIDE STICK SNAREDRY LOW TOMTOM DRY HIGHROOM TOM LOWTOM ROOM HIGHCLOSED HI-HAT 1CLOSED HI-HAT 2SYNTH HAS CLOSEDPEDAL HI-HATOPEN HI-HATRIDE CYMBALCRASH CYMBAL

TRUMP VARIATIONSAXOPHONE SAXVARIATION 1VARIATION 2

BREATH WAVE:WOOD FLUTEChiff FLUTEVOX oohsVOCAL ENSEMBLE

TUNED PERC:MARIMBAKALIMBASTEEL DRUMDOORBELLPOTLID HITSYNTH PLUCKPLINK HORNPIANO PINGORCHESTRA HITRACK-BELL

TRANSWAVE:FORMANT XPLANET-XELECTRO-XPULSE 1-XPULSE 2-XRESONANT 1-XRESONANT 2-XRESONANT 3-XRESONANT 4-X

MULTI-WAVE:ALL WAVES

SYNTH BASS 3CHOIRSHAKUHACHITIMPANIVIBESAGOGO BELL-2SHEKERETAIKOTAIKO RMWHISTLESHAKERCONGA SLAPTRIANGLECASTANETSHyoshigiSYNTH KISSSYN COWBELLSYN RIMSHOTVOCAL AAHVOCAL UNHVOCAL UHHVOCAL TEHKICK DANCEENKA KICKLONG RAP KIKDANCE SNAREHIPHOP KICK1HIPHOP KICK2HIPHOP SNAREFULL PIPEORG

Page 105


02 Delay Time / DirectionWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 2

Delay timeThe parameters for the delay time is the time after the keyStop until the actual sound starts. The control range is 000to 250 in 4 millisecond increments. This means that delays of morepossible than a second.

Initiating a voice when the key is released - The highest value forDelay is KEYUP. That is, the tuner only sounds when the buttonis released.

Direction of playThis parameter determines whether the waveform forward or backwardto be played.

Waves from the TRANSWAVE, WAVEFORM and inharmonicClasses based on loops and therefore have a fixed direction of play.If one of these waveforms is active, the Direction parameter does not appear.

03Home Index / Mod Source and Amount (Loop Length)Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Start Index = 00

Mod = VEL * +00

Start Index = 00

Loop Length = 000

Modulation source Intensity Loop length

Home IndexHere the starting point of the sample is adjusted. If START = 00, theSample played completely. Increasing the value will be more and morecut off from the beginning of the sample. This can be, for example, the

6-13

Cut typical approach of a sample, just the looping part oflooped (standing) sounds to use.

Range: 00 to 99

Mod SourceThe modulation source. Here you determine which of the 15 modulatorsto modulate the starting point. Each modulator is used.

Page 106


6-14

Mod AmountThe modulation intensity determines how much of the above selected modulatorwill affect the waveform. If this value is +00, the starting point isunchanged. Positive values move it forward, ie away from the beginning.Negative values move the starting point back to the beginning of the sample. BothParameter does not exist for inharmonic, and WAVEFORM MULTIWAVE.

Range: -99 to +99

Loop LengthSpecifies the number of waves within the loop. There's onlyMULTI-WAVE.

Range: 000-121

Note: Two waveform classes, inharmonic and WAVEFORM have toThis screen no parameters. Program a voice with theseWelenformen, the screen will be skipped.

04 Voice Restrike Decay TimeWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 4

Voice Restrike Decay TimeThis parameter determines how long a sound decays after it againhas been struck.

Range: 00 to 99

05Change Sound ModeWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 5

Change sound modeWith Enter • Save to switch the sound mode here. Work inStandard sound mode, switch so in the drum sound mode, and thecorresponding basic settings are called.


6 - 15

Pitch BankIn the pitch-bank the basic settings for the pitch to theVoice adjusted and programmed the modulation sources for pitch.

10 Oct / Semi / Fine (Oscillator Tune)Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

OctChanges the pitch in octave steps.

Range: -4 to +4 octaves

SemiChanges the pitch in semitone steps. Increase or decreasethis value by more than +11 or -11, the octave is to automaticallyincreased or decreased one step.

FineChanges the pitch in cent increments. (One cent is 1/100 semitone).

Range: -99 to +99

11Pitch BankEnv1 / LFO / Mod Source and Amount

Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 1

Env1 = -99 = -99 LFO

Mod LFO * +99

Modulation source Intensity modulation

On the Pitch Mod screen pitch is modulated. Envelope 1 andLFO can be here always use, while an additional modulatorcan be chosen freely.

Env1Envelope 1 - Determines how much the first envelope on the pitchshould work.

Range: -99 to +99

Page 108


LFOModulation intensity of the low-frequency oscillator - The LFOmostly used for vibrato, but may have different effectsproduce, depending on the waveform used.

Range: -99 to +99

Mod SourceThe modulation source - Here you can select an additional 15Modulators for the pitch.

Mod Amount

6-16

The Depth - determines how much of the modulator on theIs to act pitch.

Range: -99 to +99

12 Keyboard Pitch TrackingPitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 2

Keyboard Pitch TrackingDetermines whether the pitch of the voice is affected by the keyboard,or should stand firmly on C 4.

• ON - The pitch is controlled by the keyboard.• OFF - All buttons have the same pitch (C4) when the oscillator

Tune parameter was not changed. If it is, the pitch would be theVoice sound transposed to the value on the Oscillator TuneHas been set screen.

13 Glide / Glide TimePitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 3

GlideEnables the glide (portamento) and various types of monophonicVoice allocation. However, the time is for all three voices of fashionindividually. There are four Glide Modes:• OFF - no effect. This is normal, polyphonic playing without

Portamento.• RETRIGGER - In this mode, the voice is monophonic, with

the envelopes of the voice with each note you play againbe played forward. As with LEGATO mode below the glide occursEffect only when tied notes.

• MINI - Similar to the mono mode with analog synthesizers. The Voiceis only monophonic and Portamento always active(Assuming that Glide time is higher than 0). If you simplywant monophonic play without portamento, turn the Glide

Page 109


Mode to "MINI-MODE" and the glide time to 0. In contrast to theFashion RETRIGGER be played only on the envelopes staccatoNotes replayed from the beginning.

• LEGATO - Here Portamento only occurs when playing legato manner(Bound) on. Play unbound notes, you do not have aPortamento. In contrast to RETRIGGER mode, theEnvelopes played only in staccato style of play from the beginning.

Note: The RETRIGGER, MINI and LEGATO modes have a kind of"Touch Memory" - Get a button, while another stillis kept jumping or sliding the pitch to this sound. Withpressed sustain pedal is released, this function dynamically.

Glide TimeSpecifies the time in which the pitch glides from one note to another.

Range: 00 to 99 (the higher the value, the longer the time)

6-17

Page 110


ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelopesAn envelope (Envelope) is a trajectory, according to which achanged to any value or parameter over a specific time. ThisEnvelopes are already automatically pitch, timbre andAssociated volume, although ENV 1 and ENV 2 for other purposescan be used.

• ENV 1 is associated with the pitch of the voice. On the Pitch ModScreen there is an extra parameter for the modulation by ENV. 1

• ENV 2 is connected to the filter frequency of the voice. For each of theThere are two filters a parameter ENV 2 = ____ in the filter - bank,which controls the strength of the timbre modulation.

• AMP is firmly connected to the volume of the voice. The AMP envelopealways controls the output volume of the voice. All otherVolume modulations in the output - Bank before the envelopeused.

The envelopes of the KS-32 are connected to the common ADSR envelopesajar, but with many improvements. While the ADSREnvelope gets along with three adjustable times and a level that has theKS-32 envelope four times and four levels.

The illustration shows the structure of a KS-32 envelope:

99

0

KEY HERO RELEASEDECAY 1DECAY 2

INITIAL

PEAK

SUSTAIN

KEYDOWN TIME KEYUP

ATTACK

BREAK POINTLEVEL

6-18

Page 111


6-19

20 Levl / TimeEnv1 Bank Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen 0th

Sustain

Levl = 99 99 99 99

Time = 99 99 99 99

Initial Peak Breakfast

Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Levl - LevelThis parameter sets the levels of the four envelope levels. The four valuescorrespond to the following levels:

INITIALThis is the level at which the envelope starts.Range: 00 to 99

PEAKDetermines the level which the envelope after the ATTACK timereached.Range: 00 to 99

BREAK POINTDetermines the level after the time of DECAY. 1Range: 00 to 99

SUSTAINDetermines the level of the end of DECAY 2 and is also theLevel at which the note is held while the button is pressed.Range: 00 to 99

Page 112


TimeHere, the values for the four time segments of the envelopeentered. Note that times are meant here and not

6-20

Intensities. That said, here it is always about a fixed time of aLevel to the next, no matter how high the level.

ATTACKThis is the time between INITIAL and PEAK, ie fromKeystroke to the second level. The higher the value, the longer theTime. It must here be not necessarily the attack because the INITIAL levelalso may well be higher than the PEAK exactly what additionalDecay stage would result.

Range: 00 to 99 (the times are given in the table below).

DECAY 1The time it takes for the envelope of PEAK to BREAK.

Range: 00 to 99

DECAY 2The time it takes for the envelope of BREAK to SUSTAIN.

Range: 00 to 99

RELEASEThis defines the time it takes for the sound after the key is released,to the level of SUSTAIN to come back to zero.

Range: 00 to 99

0001020304050607080910111213141516171819

2021222324252627282930313233343536373839

40414243444546474849

.00

.01

.02

.03

.04

.06

.07

.08

.08

.09

.10

.11

.11

.12

.13

.14

.15

.16

.17

.19

.20

.22

.23

.25

.27

.29

.31

.33

.35

.38

.41

.44

.47

.50

.54

.58

.62

.66

.71

.76

.82

.88

.941.01.01.11.21.31.41.5

50515253545556575859

6061626364656667686970717273747576777879

8081828384858687888990919293949596979899

1.61.71.82.02.12.32.42.62.83.0

3.23.53.74.04.34.64.95.35.76.16.57.07.58.18.69.39.9101112

1314151617181921222426283032343739424549

Value

ENVELOPE TIMES

Value Value Value ValueTime

(In seconds)Time

(In seconds)Time

(In seconds)Time

(In seconds)Time

(In seconds)

Page 113


21 Levv / AtckV / VelCurvEnv1 Bank Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 1

Levv - Dynamic Level ControlThis parameter lowers all levels at lower velocity. Themeans that the values for INITIAL, PEAK, BREAK and SUSTAIN arePeak values, and can be achieved only in a heavy attack. "Levv"So regulates the amount of gain-reduction at low momentum. With thisParameter to have a continuous dynamic control of all fourLevel, depending on the velocity. With the different dynamics curves (VelCurv)can be further refined it.

Range: 00 to 99

AtckV - Dynamic control of the attack timeThus, the attack time is controlled by the velocity. If theValue for "AtckV" increases, the attack time with increasing momentum isgetting shorter. In "AtckV = 00", this parameter has no effect.

6-21

Range: 00 to 99

VelCurv - dynamic curveHere you can choose between four different dynamic curves whenthe dynamic control (levv) described above is active.

The choices are: QUIKRISE, CONVEX, LINEAR, and CONCAVE.The graph below shows the input / output characteristics with the stopDynamics on the X-axis (from eft to right) and the correspondingOutput value on the Y-axis (from the bottom up).

CONVEX0

50

0 50 1000

50

50 100QUICKRISE LINEAR0

50

50 1000 CONCAVE0

50

0 500

Page 114


22 Fashion / KeyboardTrkEnv1 Bank Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 2

Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2)• NORMAL - The envelope is passed to the diagram.

After releasing the button uses the RELEASE time until the soundhas sustained.

• FINISH - The envelope runs once completely, no matter when the buttonis released. The SUSTAIN stage is skipped. AfterDECAY 2 is over, the envelope goes directly into their RELEASE phaseabout. This is good for percussion sounds, if any sound the sameTo have curve, no matter how long the button is held.

• REPEAT - In this mode, after DECAY 2 instead ofSUSTAIN phase directly played over again and again. Shallthe key is released, the envelope goes directly to the RELEASE phaseabout. With this mode, complex, rhythmic effectsproduce.

MODE (AMP) - Voice TriggerBecause the AMP envelope controls the volume, should consider a few thingsbe considered when working with the different play-stylesis:

In NORMAL mode: If a high delay time set for the Wavebeen ( Wave Bank, Screen 2 ), and sometimes let go of the button before thishas elapsed, no sound will be heard even when the sustain pedalis pressed.

In FINISH mode: here a delay time is programmed, the sound comesanyway, even if the key has already been released.

In REPEAT mode: The waveform for each repetition againplayed from the beginning. From the SUSTAIN level, it goes directly to the INITIALLevel back.

Distribution of votes

6-22

In order to optimize the distribution of the 32 voices of the KS-32, andTo avoid unwanted "stealing" of voices, one should understandhave when the KS-32 uses a voice, and when she againBack "in the pot" does, so it can be used elsewhere.The results from the combination of fashion and envelope waveformType.

Page 115


6-23

A looped (standing) wave uses a voice until theEnvelope reaches zero. For such a wave in the NORMAL orREPEAT mode:

99

0INITIAL

PEAK

BREAKSUSTAIN

TASTEPRESSED TASTEReleased

VOICE IS FREEIF THE ENVELOPEHAS REACHED ZERO

Looped Voice

Voice isoccupied

AMP envelope = Envelope= Waveform data

Or Emvelope mode FINISH:

= Envelope= Waveform data

99

0

INITIAL

PEAK

BREAK

TASTEPRESSED TASTEReleasedSUSTAIN = 0

Voiceis occupied

Looped Voice

AMP envelope

VOICE ISRELEASED SOONTHE ENVELOPE ONNULL, EVEN IFTHE KEY INCOMPRESSED

Applies to ungeloopte Waves: The voice is free iff the whole sampleis played, regardless of the level at which the envelope is just:

= Envelope= Wave data

AMP envelope99

0

INITIAL

PEAK

BREAKSUSTAIN

TASTEPRESSEDTASTEReleased

"Percussion" sound

Voiceis occupiedVOICE IS FREEINDEPENDENTFROMENVELOPE

KeyboardTrk - keyboard controlChanged the times of the envelope depends on the position of theplayed note on the keyboard.

Increasing the value for Keyboard Trk all times shorter the higherplayed by middle C, and so it longer if you continueplays below. The higher the value of this parameter, the greater theTime differences between the highest and lowest key.


6-24

The mean C thus remains always constant at the same value andnot affected by this parameter.

Range: -98 to +98

23 Select DefaultsEnv1 Bank Press Edit Sounds / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 3

Select DefaultsIf you enter • Save push button appear 17 different"Preset" envelopes which are used in the current envelopecan. This preset envelopes are:

• FULL ON • RAMP UP • WIND PITCH• ALL ZEROS • RAMP DOWN • BASIC PAD• FULL VELRNG • SHORT BLIP • AMP BLIP• SLOW STRING • BRASS FILTER • TRANSIENT• PIANO DECAY • REPEAT TRI • SLOW LFO• PERCUSSION • REPEAT RAMP • SLOW LFO

This envelope values are particularly useful as a starting point whenyou want to create new sounds. After selecting an envelope shape,press again Enter • Save to place this in the voice.

Page 117


The LFO BankThe LFO bank contains all the parameters for the low-frequency oscillator. are Each voice of the KS-32 has its own LFO that as everywhereModulator can be used where periodic modulationsare desired. Usually used for effects such as vibrato LFOor tremolo.

30 LFO speed / noise rateLFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen 0th

6-25

LFO SpeedAdjusts the speed of the LFO modulation.

Range: 00 to 99The table below shows the frequency (in Hertz) for each value:

LFO FREQUENCIES

Value0001020304050607080910111213141516171819

20212223242526272829

1.251:501.752:002.252:502.753:003.253:50

30313233343536373839

40414243444546474849

3.754:004.254:504.755:005.255:505.756:00

6.256:506.757:007.257:507.758:008.258:50

50515253545556575859

6061626364656667686970717273747576777879

8081828384858687888990919293949596979899

8.759:009.259:509.75

10:0010:2510:5010.7511:00

11:2511:5011.7512:0012:2512:5012.7513:0013:2513:5013.7514:0014:2514:5014.7515:0015:2515:5015.7516.00

16:2516:5016.7517:0017:2517:5017.7518:0018:2518:5018.7519:0019:2519:5019.7520:0020:2520:5020.7521:00

.00

.05

.06

.06

.06

.07

.07

.08

.08

.09

.10

.11

.13

.14

.17

.20

.25

.33

.501.0

Value ValueFreq

(In Hz)Freq

(In Hz) valueFreq

(In Hz) valueFreq

(In Hz)Freq

(In Hz)

Noise-rateOne of the 15 possible modulation sources of KS-32 is NOISE. TheNoise generator is a modulation source that generates random level.It will look something like this:

Noise rate

0

+100

-100

NOISE 1

Noise rate

0

+100

-100

NOISE 2

Page 118


The noise rate determines how often the changes of level. Low valuesezeugen slow modulations, high values faster.

Range: 00 to 99

31 Level / Dlay / ModLFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen. 1

Level = 99 = 00 Dlay

Mod = WHEEL

Level - LFO levelAdjusts the output intensity of LFO modulation. The effectan LFO modulator is added to this value.

Range: 00 to 99

Dlay - LFO DelayDetermines the delay of the LFO intensity, ie the time from zero tounder the "Level" set value is reached. This makes it possible effectsachieve vibrato and tremolo as transient.

6-26

Range: 00 to 99

Mod - LFO Depth modulation sourceSelects the 15 modulation sources for a LFO ratefrom. Each addressed here modulation source acts in addition to the valueset under LFO level.

32 Wave / restartLFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen. 2

WaveHere, the waveform for the LFO is selected. There are seven possibleValues:• TRIANGLE - The delta wave, which usually vibrato or tremolo for

is used.• SINE - The pure sine wave, not as abrupt in the borders.• SINE / TRI - A mixture of sine and triangle.• POS / SINE - POS / SINE is used in the fields such as POS / TRI.• POS / TRI - POS / TRI is a purely positive delta wave, useful

for guitar-like vibrato, where the pitch shifted upwards onlywill.

Page 119


• SAWTOOTH - The sawtooth wave is usually only for specialEffects used.

• SQUARE - The square wave generated trill.

LFO Wave Shapes

0

+100

-100

TRIANGLE SINE SINE / TRI

POS / SINE POS / TRI SAWTOOTH

SQUARE

0

+100

-100

0

+100

-100

0

+100

-100

0

+100

-100

+50

+100

0

+50

+100

0

RestartDetermines whether the LFO for each new keystroke again from "zero"to begin. When "OFF", the modulation is running constantly. When "ON"modulation with each stroke starts again at "zero".

6-27

Page 120


6-28

The filter bank

Each KS-32 voice has its own pair of digital filters, Filter 1 and Filter 2,connected in series. The setting of the filter determines whichFrequency range are passed to the exit.

Low-pass / high-passA low-pass filter allows only frequencies below the cutoff pointhappen - higher frequencies are filtered out. The opposite is truefor the high pass filter. He passes only the high frequencies. The KS-32Filter 1 is always a low-pass filter 2 during both low- andCan be high-pass filter.

Pole: The slope"Pole" describing the slope, or the efficiency of a filter.When KS-32, the poles of the filter are dependent on each other. Are togetherit always four.

These four poles are distributed on the two filters, that is 2: 2 or 3: 1.A 1-pole filter has a slope of 6 dB per octave, a 2-poleFilter 12 dB per octave and a 4-pole filter 24 dB. A 24 dBLow-pass filter to get (for the "classic" analog sounds)must be set to 12 dB, both filters - adds up to 24 dB.

Cutoff FrequencyEach filter has a threshold known as the cutoff frequency. This is theFrequency at which the filtering begins. This cutoff frequency is determinedbe adjusted or modulated arbitrarily. It can be veryinteresting configurations developed by the filterdifferent modulators occupied. It can be the one with theModulation open while the other closes at the same time.

40 Filter1 / Filter2Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen 0th

Filter1 = 2LoPass

Filter2 = 2HiPass

Filter1 - Filter 1 ModeDetermines whether filter 1, a 2 pole or 4-pole low-pass should be.

Filter2 - Filter Mode 2Filter 2 can be used as 2-pole or 1-pole high-pass and 2-poleor 1-pole low-pass function.These two parameters are interdependent. If achanged, also changes the other.

Page 121


Filter configurations

6-29

This diagram shows some possible filter configurations. Links arethe respective curves of the two filters shown separately. The right isthe possible forms of the combined filter.

amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

18 db / oct

Filter 1 = 3 pole / low-pass

amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

18 db / oct

Filter 1 = 3 pole / low-pass

amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

24 db / oct

4 pole / low-passamplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

6 db / oct

Filter 2 = 1 pole / low-passamplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff # 2

freq.cutoff # 1

6 db / oct

24 db / oct

4 pole / low-pass

+ = Or

(When F1 & 2are tuned to thesame freq.)

+ =amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

12 db / oct amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff

12 db / oct

Filter 2 = 2 pole / low-passFilter 1 = 2 pole / low-pass

amplitude

frequency0

24 db / octfreq.cutoff

4 pole / low-pass

(When F1 & 2 aretuned to the samefreq.)

amplitude

frequency0

freq.cutoff # 1freq.cutoff # 2

12 db / oct

24 db / oct

4 pole / low-pass

Or

amplitude

frequency0


amplitude

frequency0

6 db / oct freq.cutoff

amplitude

frequency0

F FB

Filter 1 = 3 / LP Filter 2 = 1 / HP Bandpass

L+ =

+ =amplitude

frequency0

12 db / octfreq.cutoff amplitude

frequency0


amplitude

frequency0

FB FL

BandpassFilter 1 = 2 pole / low-pass Filter 2 = 2 pole / high-pass

Page 122


41 FC1 Cutoff / Envelope2Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 1

FC1 Cutoff - 1 filter cutoff frequencyAdjusts the filter cutoff frequency. In a low-pass filter ata value of 127 passed all frequencies. Takesback to the cutoff, the sound is muffled, such as theTreble controls on the stereo system.

Range: 000 to 127

Envelope2Determines the intensity of the second envelope the cutoff frequencymodulated.

Range: -99 to +99

42FC1 Keyboard / Mod Source and Amount

6-30

42 Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 2

Intensity

FC1 Keyboard + 25 =

Mod = VEL * +29

Filter Cutoff

Modulation source

FC1 KeyboardAdjusts the intensity with which the keyboard will affect the filter cutoff. Withpositive values opens the filter, the higher you play (Keyboard FilterTracking). For an exact keyboard tracking (ratio 1: 1) toachieve, make FC1 Keyboard = +50.

Range: -99 to +99

Mod SourceHere one of the 16 modulation sources is determined for the filter.

Mod AmountAdjusts the intensity of this modulation source for the cutoff frequency.

Range: -99 to +99

Page 123


43 FC2 Cutoff / Envelope2Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 3

FC2 Cutoff - 2 filter cutoff frequencyAdjusts the filter cutoff frequency. In a low-pass filter ata value of 127 passed all frequencies. Taking the cutoffback, the sound darker, a bit like the treble control on theStereo.

Range: 000 to 127

Envelope2Modulation intensity envelope for the 2nd filter. 2

Range: -99 to +99

44FC2 Keyboard / FC1 Mod> FC2Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 4

FC2 KeyboardAdjusts the intensity with which the keyboard will affect the filter cutoff. Withpositive values opens the filter, the higher you play (Keyboard FilterTracking). For an exact keyboard tracking (ratio 1: 1) toachieve, make FC1 Keyboard = +50.

Range: -99 to +99

Mod-FC1> FC2Herewith the gewähle for filter 1 modulation source for filter 2taken. FC 2If no separate modulation source. This is the onlypossibility to modulate its cutoff. Is "Mod FC1 -> FC2 = ON", hasFilter 2 has the same modulation as filter first

The Env2 and amp benches

6-31

The parameters of this screen are exactly those of the screens for Env1 match ( Bank 2 ). More on this in part by Env 1, a few pages earlier.Again, Env 1 controls the pitch, Env 2 filter cutoff and the AmpVolume.

Page 124


The output BankThe output database parameter control, along with the ampEnvelope, the output volume and the panorama (the Assignmentin the stereo image) of the voice. There are also keyboard scaling,Effect allocation and assignment voices (Voice Priority).

70 V / Boost / Mod Source and AmountOutput Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen 0th

Intensity

V = 84 Boost = OFF

Mod LFO * +29

Modulation source

Output level Boost

Volume - Voice volumeAdjusts the overall volume of the voice. (Can also known as the intensityUnderstand the amp envelope.)

Range: 00 to 99

Boost - increase in volumeIf you switch this parameter, the volume of the voice to +12 israised dB ("boosted"). Not for cardiac patients.

• ON - +12 dB boost the output volume.• OFF - The Voice is played normally.

Mod Source - Volume modulatorTo select one of the 16 modulation sources, in addition to the ampEnvelope that is always active.

Mod Amount - volume modulation intensityVolume modulator Amount - Determines the Imtensität, with hereVolume is affected.

Range: -99 to +99

6-32

Page 125


6-33

71 KeybdScale / KeyRangeOutput Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 1

The following two parameters at the bottom of this display setversatile tool for volume control through the keyboard is:

KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone)This can be a voice over a certain range of the keyboard onor be hidden (see below). Crossfade This allows(Transitions) from one voice to another implement. A value of +99displays a voice from zero to full volume, within thebelow defined zone. -99 With the opposite happens, the voice ishidden. Intermediate values hide the voice from zero to acertain intermediate value.

If the parameter is set to ZONE, the voice is within the limitsidentical, as they can not be heard outside this range.

KeyRange - Highest and lowest keyDetermines the limits for Fade In, Fade Out or ZONE. Is thisSelected parameter values with the data entry control , the• Yes Up / Down • No cursor or entered from the keyboardbe. Select this parameter and simply play the lowestThe desired zone button. The note is displayed and the cursorjumps up high key. Now you play the highest key of their zone. TheValue is accepted and the cursor disappears. Do You Havesomething wrong, you simply select the parameter again, andcorrect input on your camera.

72Output BankOutput Bus / Priority

Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 2

Output busEvery voice of a sound can be assigned to one of three "effects loops"be. The diagram below shows the waveform of each path. SeePart 4 - Effects for more information on programming of certainEffects.

Vol Pan L

RL

REffect 2

FX1

FX2

Mix1

Mix2

Effect 1

Voice Output

DestinationBus

DRY

Outputs

Page 126


PriorityThis parameter allows you to determine how theDistribution of votes in the KS-32 is made. The Voice can "LOW,MID or HIGH Priority "have. The simple rule is that a voicecan be "stolen" from another only if they have a loweror has the same priority.

MEDIUM is the usual setting for this parameter. LOW can

6-34

you take for voices that are dispensable in most (such. as voices,duplicated the same sound, play with mild depression). HIGHit starts at the top for sounds that are to be protected, asSolo sounds, drums or important areas in a sequence.

73 Output BankPan / Vel Window

Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 3

Pan - Pan positionSpread the voice in the stereo mix. The range is from 00 (far left) to99 (right). 50 is exactly in the middle.

VelWindowHere are a dynamic value is entered on the or the Voiceis not being played. This can be dynamic transitions betweenVoices realize. Range: -127 to +127. At +000, the parameterno effect. Positive values mean the voice plays only when theDynamics is higher than the value. Lower for negative values.

Page 127

KS-32 user guide Part 7 - drum sound programming

Part 7 - drum sound programming

• This part includes all the parameters of the programmingDrum sets have to do.

The KS-32 drum sound construction ......................................... .................... 7 - 1Selecting the drum sound Edit ........................................... ...................... 7 - 1The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 7 - 2The Wave Bank .............................................. .......................................... 7 - 2

Current note number .............................................. .................. 7 - 2Key Range - Low key / high key .......................................... ....... 7 - 3How to "gaps" in the Key Map opens .................................... 7 - 3Wave-class ............................................... ...................................... 7 - 4Wave-name ............................................... ..................................... 7 - 5Direction ................................................. ........................................ 7 - 5Clear-key-mapped ............................................. .................................. 7 - 5Change sound mode ............................................. ......................... 7 - 6

The Pitch Bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 6Oct...................................................................................................7 - 6Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. .................. 7 - 7

The Filter-Bank.........................................................................................7 - 7Fc-cut - filter cutoff frequency ......................................... ..... 7 - 7Gate time ............................................... ........................................ 7 - 8Levv - Velocity-level control ........................................... ........ 7 - 8Voice stealing ............................................... .............................. 7 - 8

The output Bank .............................................. ........................................ 7-9Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ............. 7-9

7-1

Output bus ............................................... ....................................... 7-9Utilization of the General MIDI drum maps ......................................... .7 - 10Use of performance presets ............................................. ............... 7-11

The KS-32 drum sound structureAs mentioned earlier, there are two types sounds in the KS-32:Default sounds and drum sounds. Drum sounds are different fromDefault sounds in two ways:The number of voices - Standard Sounds consist of three Voices, DrumSounds from 17 different voices. Each voice, anotherHis instrument. In drum sounds is always only a sound on eachButton.The voices construction - Each of the 17 voices of a drum sound consists of:• a digital oscillator with a KS-32 waveforms

(Except TRANS WAVES and MULTI-WAVE).• Two multi-mode digital filter, fixedly coupled as a 4-pole low pass.• a number of specific drum sound parameters.

Selecting the drum sound EditBecause the KS-32 has two different sound modes, it also has twoEdit Mode; one for default sounds and one for drum sounds. Aboutto program a drum sound, you must first enter Drum EditFashion.

There are two ways to Drum Edit mode:

Page 128

Part 7 - drum sound programming KS-32 user guide

• Sound Mode command - This is the normal way to the in betweenModes switch. The command is on screen 05 ( Bank 0 , Screen 5 ) intwo edit modes.

• Selection of Sounds - A second possibility is the simpleSelecting a corresponding sounds. Together with the soundalso changes the edit mode. It comes in the Drum Edit byyou call a drum sound, and then press the Edit Sound button.

The Sound Edit modeEach time you want to change a drum sound, you mustKS-32 first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done byPress the Edit Sound button. If you are in the Sound Edit mode,but have not been selected drum sound, you must firstChange sound mode command call ( Edit Sound, Wave Bank ( Bank 0 )Screen 5 to enter a default drum sound. After youUnder Change sound mode Enter • Save pressed, you canchange individual drum sound parameters to your liking, ora whole new sound to create.

The Wave BankIn the Wave Bank waveform and the corresponding playback canParameters of the voice to be edited.

00 Current Key Number / Key Range / Wave NameWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen 0th

Key = # A4 A4 : G5

DYNAMIC KICK

Current key number Lo Key Hi Key

Wave Name

Current note numberUse this parameter to 17 different drum voices areselected.

7 - 2

Select a default sound, and then change the soundMode to enter the drum sound-Edit (more on the exchange ofSound Mode "Screen 5 - Change sound mode"). This causes theDefault map loaded into the edit buffer. You will notice thateach time you press a different key, the correspondingNote number changes. Here, the parameters for the changeKeyboard range (low key and high key) and the waveform only

Page 129


7 - 3

several keys. If you count times carefully, you will notice thatThere are exactly 17 different.

By playing on the keyboard always choose new voices toEditing on. Next, set the waveform, the range or theChange sound parameters.

Key-Range - Low key / high keyThe low and high key parameters together form the range, inwhich the individual drum sound is heard (a voice).Have you selected this parameter, you can quite easilyPressing the appropriate buttons to enter the range (only lowKey, then high key).

How to "gaps" in the Key Map opensIf you change the tonal range of a particular campaign, it mayhappen that these will then cover one or more other voices. Themay look like this:

As you can see, the cover 11 voices to the keyboard range of KS32 from. The 6 remaining voices are hidden (shaded hereshown).

Let's say you want to add an additional voice (becauseThey realize that you can not live without tambourine): Tofreizubekommen another voice, you must:

• first find a button for your tambourine, z. B. F here. 6

Next, we have to go through at the point the gap

• Select the voice that is currently on F 6 (by F 6play), and change their range so that the lowest note higherthan F 6. Because we do not need additional voices on R 6, thehighest note remain as it is.

This closes a gap in R 6 is produced, for now here is no Voicemore places.

Page 130


7 - 4

• Play F 6 to select the Voice. The display shows:

Key = ??? F # 6: G6

ANVIL HIT

One of the previously hidden voices is listed by playing the keycall, and put into the gap. If more than one voice obscured beafter this called by repeatedly pressing the number key.The question mark means that on this key not have a voice oris defined.

• To finish it off, you define the range for thisVoice, make it a part of the map. Then locate the shaftwaveform varies and edit as desired.

01 Class Wave / Wave NameWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 1

Wave = STRING WAVE

STRING ENSEMBLESingle shaft

WaveformClass

Wave ClassThis parameter determines the waveform for a given classVoice. Select this parameter, you can use the Data EntryController or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor through the variousClasses scroll. Then select the exact waveform.

Each time the waveform class is changed, is the firstWaveform of this class in the display.

The KS-32 waveforms are divided into 13 classes:

These classes include samples of acoustic and electronicSounds that serve as the basis for many realistic sounds. If necessary,these waves multisamples (of different stand points of theTonal range resampled) for an authentic sound reproduction.(A detailed list of all waveform classes, see Part 6Standard sound programming ).

Note : Do waveforms from the classes TRANS WAVES and MULTI-WAVEnot be used as drum sounds.

Page 131


Wave NameHere is the exact waveform is selected, played by the Voiceshould be. This is done using the data entry control , with theUp / Down cursor possibility to change class.You will find (A list of all waveforms in the previous section 6 aboveStandard sound programming )

02 DirectionWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 2

DirectionAllows the playback direction the wave is determined. Forward andbackward are possible.

7 - 5

Have waveforms from the WAVEFORM and inharmonic classesonly a fixed direction of play. In their case, this parameterskipped.

03Clear Key MapWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Clear Key MapThis command displays the current key-map is deleted from the edit bufferand all voices set to a range of A0 A0. With theEnter • Save button is released this command. Use it if youto discard their work and begin again.

Page 132


04 Set Default MapWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 4

Set default MapThis is all that was in the edit buffer, cleared, and the plant'sdefault settings replaced. The figure shows these defaultSettings:

KICK DRUMS

ClosedHas

PedalHasRideCymbal

CrashCymbalTimbale

BongoClaps

TamBorineCowbell

FingerSnapsElectricKick

RoomKickOpenHas

ThumpSnare

RoomSnareDry TomLow

Dry TomHigh

SNARE DRUMSHI-HATS

CYMBALSTOM TOMS MISC. PERCUSSION

Default Drum Map

Drum sound groups

05 Change Sound ModeWave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 5

Change sound modePress the Enter • Save button to toggle the sound mode.If you are in drum sound mode, which will bring up the standardSound mode, and the default settings for default sounds are inthe edit buffer is loaded.

7 - 6

The Pitch BankIn the pitch-bank the basic settings for the pitch to theVoice carried out, and whether the pitch affects from the keyboardto be or not.

10Oct / Semi / Fine (Voice Tune)Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

OctChanges the pitch in octave steps.

Range: -4 to +4 octaves

Page 133


SemiChanges the pitch in semitones. Go beyond -11 or +11addition, the octave is one step increased / decreased.

FineChanges the pitch of the voice in one-cent steps (1/100 of a semitone)

Range: -99 to +99


Keyboard Pitch TrackingDetermines whether the pitch of the voice are controlled by the keyboardis, or is fixed at C4.

• ON - The pitch is controlled by the keyboard.• OFF - All buttons have the same pitch (C4) when the oscillator

Has not been changed tune parameters. Otherwise, the voice to thethere certain value transposed.

The filter bankThe filter settings determine the tone of the voice. DrumSounds all have a 4-pole low-pass filter. Read more in the chapter onFilter bank in Part 6 - Standard sound programming .


40 Fc Cutoff / levvFilter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen 0th

Fc cutoff - filter cutoff frequencySpecifies the initial value for the filter cutoff. At 127 allFrequencies to pass. Lower settings curtail the highFrequency components of the sound.

Range: 000 to 127

Levv - Velocity-level controlThis parameter lowers the filter cutoff, a weaker attack. Theis, the FcCutoff value is the peak value of only the strongestStop is reached. With the velocity level is determined by how stronglythe cutoff is taken back by light touch. This results in aprecise dynamic control of the filter, depending on the stop.

Range: 00 to 99

7 - 7

Page 134


7 - 8

The amp BankIn the AMP -Bank the parameters for the output volume is theVoice controlled within a drum sounds.

60 Gate time / release timeAmp Bank Press Edit Sound / Amp (Bank 6) / Screen 0th

Gate timeDetermines the time that remains the envelope to its peak beforeenters the release phase.

Range: 00 to 99

Note : This parameter is only effective in FINISH mode.

Release timeIn the NORMAL mode which is the time of the envelope after releasingKey needed to get back to zero. In FINISH mode beginsthe release time after the expiration of the gate time, no matter when the buttonwas released.

Range: 00 to 99

61Levv / FashionAmp Bank Press Edit Sound / Amp (Bank 6) / Screen. 1

Levv - Velocity-level controlThe Velocity-level parameter decreases the volume at lowerStop. As with the corresponding filter parameter here is theset under Voice Volume volume of the peak value. The higher theValue for levv, the greater the change in volume is due to the presenceimpact dynamics

Range: 00 to 99

Fashion - Amp Envelope mode• NORMAL - The envelope plays back normally, as in the

Figure is shown on the following page.• FINISH - The envelope makes a full bore, no matter how long the

Button was pressed. The envelope wait while the gate time, until it inthe release time occurs. This is good for percussion sounds, which alwaysequal duration, regardless of how long a key is held.

Voice StealTo optimize the use of all 32 voices of the KS-32, andinevitable "voice stealing" to get a grip, it ishelpful, the relationship between used waveform and theEnvelope fashion to understand.

Page 135


A looped (standing) waveform blocked the vote until theEnvelope speed has reached zero. In normal envelope mode:

And with envelope fashion FINISH:

For ungeloopte waveforms (primarily Percussion and Drum Waves)

7-9

applies: The voice is free, once the sample has been played once,no matter what the envelope level. The voice is free for anotherSound:

The output BankThe parameters of the output -Bank control the overall volume and thePanorama of the voice.

70 Volume / Boost / PanOutput Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen 0th

Volume - Voice volumeControls the overall volume of the voice.

Range: 00 to 99

Boost - Volume increaseIf this parameter is set to "ON", the selected voice in the level of+12 DB raised. Not for infarct at risk.

• ON - The voice adds a +12 dB boost.• OFF - The voice is normal.

Pan - PanoramaArranges the voice in the stereo image.

The range is from -98 (hard left) to +98 (far right). The value of +00corresponds exactly to the middle.

71 Output Bus / VelCurvOutput Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 1

Output busEvery voice of a sound can be assigned to one of three effects loopsbe. The diagram below shows the waveform of the three paths. Morethis in part 4 - Effects .

Page 136


VelCurv - velocity curveHere one of the four dynamic curves for the envelope is selected.These must be the parameters for the dynamic control (levv, Bank 6,Screen 1 ) be nonzero. The four curves are: QUICKRISE,CONVEX, LINEAR and CONCAVE.

Utilization of the General MIDI drum mapsThe KS-32 has two drum sounds, which together form the General MIDIForming drum map. They lie in the squares 98 and 99 and read:

GNL-MIDI kit (98) - A general purpose drum kit with the basic elementsa traditional drum kit.

GNL MIDI Perc (99) - 17 different percussion instruments for allMusical styles.

These two drum sounds can be used as templates for your own, alternative Kitsbe used easily by other waveforms in the Voicesbe used.

You will see that there are empty spaces in both sets. Theallows in poly mode that both sounds with double

7-10

can be superimposed, so a 34-voice drum kit tomake up. In this mode, you will find plenty of drum sounds to theirto realize musical ideas (assuming you preferGeneral MIDI drum map).

If you products of other manufacturers with General MIDI drum mapand use the combined sounds of the GNL MIDI kit (98) and theWant to share GNL-MIDI Perc (99), proceed as follows:

1) Define your external sequencer MIDI channel for theDrum track. In the General MIDI standard, the channel would be # 10th

2) Select the same channel (# 10) for the KS-32 GNL-MIDI kit (98).3) Copy the track in your external sequencer.4) Enter the copied track a different MIDI channel, z. B. Channel

# 11.5) Select the same MIDI channel (# 11) for the KS-32 GNL-MIDI Perc

(99).

In this environment would be the first drum track GNL-MIDI kit (98) andthe second GNL-MIDI Perc (99) control. Since both sets into one anotheraccess, there is no double notes in a loss of polyphony.

Page 137


Use of performance presetsThe KS-32 is factory with 30 internal "Performance Presets" on theBanks 0 to 2 equipped. These presets are intended to Split andLayer capabilities of the KS-32, as well as the Einsazt in MIDI connection todemonstrate. The performance preset # 29 shows the two General MIDIKits in combination on different MIDI channels (10 and 11 in thisCase). Make sure that your external sequencer also in thisChannels is set. Although we can not know what furtherMIDI instruments you will use these performance presetsbe valuable tools when using the KS-32 as a MIDI studio.

Important: This performance "templates" are not saved in ROM. If theKS-32 must re-initialize, these presets are gone. If thisSo you want to back up, we recommend archiving via MIDI Sys-Ex, soas in storage - Part 11 described.

GNL-MIDI kit Drum Map (98)

ELECTRIC KICKDANCE SNARE

CLOSED HI-HAT 1

RIDE CYMBALROOM TOM LOW

CLAPS

ROOM SNARE

SIDE STICK SNARECRASH CYMBAL

TOM ROOM HIGHCRASH CYMBAL

ROOM TOM LOW

OPEN HI-HATPEDAL HI-HAT

TOM ROOM HIGHTOM ROOM HIGH

TAMBOURINE

The diagram shows the key assignment for the GNL-MIDI kit (98)

GNL MIDI Perc Drum Map (99)

TIMBALES

CLAVESTIMBALES

BONGOSBONGOS

WHISTLESHAKERAGOGO BELL-2

TRIANGLE

7-11

BONGOSBONGOS

CONGA SLAP WOODBLOCKWOODBLOCK

AGOGO BELL-2SHAKERWHISTLE

Keys for GNL-MIDI Perc (99).

Page 138Page 139

KS-32 user guide Part 8 - Presets

8-1

Part 8 - Presets

About Presets..............................................................................................8 - 1Selecting presets ............................................... ............................... 8 - 1Preset mode and Sequencer Mode ........................................... ............... 8 - 1About tracks ................................................ .............................................. 8 - 2Layers of sounds through the track buttons .......................................... ... 8 - 3The Replace-track sound button .......................................... .................... 8 - 3Exchange of sounds in a track ............................................ ........ 8 - 3Insert a Sound with effect .......................................... 8 - 4

From the sound mode ............................................. ....................... 8 - 4From the Sequence / Preset Edit mode ......................................... ... 8 - 4From the Select-Sequence / Preset Mode ......................................... 8 - 4

Effects and Presets ............................................... .................................... 8-5About track performance parameter ............................................ ........... 8-6Layer-Lock ............................................... ................................................ 8 - 6The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) Functions ............................ 8 - 7Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset) ....................................... ........... 8 - 7In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset)The Edit Track screens ............................................ .............................. 8 - 10Vol - Volume ............................................... ........................................ 8 - 10Pan - Panorama ............................................... ..................................... 8 - 10Output.....................................................................................................8 - 10Key-Range..............................................................................................8 - 11Transpose................................................................................................8 - 11Chan - MIDI Channel ............................................. ............................. 8-12Prog - MIDI program number ........................................... ............. 8-12Program change in the KS-32 ............................................. ..................... 8-13ENSONIQ 's special bank "control" program change commands ....... 8-13Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 8-13MIDI-Status............................................................................................8 - 14Pressure - Aftertouch ............................................... ............................ 8 - 14Sustain pedal ............................................... ........................................... 8-15Timbre - 15Release....................................................................................................8 - 16

About presetsA preset is a combination of up to eight sounds and the corre-impaired performance parameters, as well as an Effect. The wholeis quickly accessible and thus ideal for live use.The Preset section, making it the Master Keyboard Department of the KS-32.At the same time a preset is also the basis for a sequence inSequencer. Here you will find all the necessary settings.The eight sounds a preset lie on eight tracks (tracks). Each trackalso stores:• What has been assigned sound,• whether the sound should sound alone, together or not at all,• and the values of all performance parameters for this track.

At a preset effect also includes a program for all eight tracks.

Page 140

Part 8 - Presets KS-32 user guide

8 - 2

Selecting presetsPress Select Seq / preset . The LED above the Select Seq / Preset - buttonindicates that you are now in the Sequence / Preset Select Mode is. On thebottom line in the display the name of the current preset. Topyou will see a "context" information and the position of the preset.

Whenever the Select Seq / Preset LED glows all,is the KS-32 in the Sequence / Preset Select mode. Over the 10Bank and Screen - keys can now be selected presets or sequencesbe (instead of the sound when the Select Sound LED lights).

Preset mode and Sequencer ModeA preset is a combination of eight tracks, the optionallycan be superimposed, and the corresponding soundsand performance parameters for each track.

A sequence is simply a preset with recorded Noteninforma-tions. In fact, each preset has been the basis of a sequence;but it contains all the parameters for the sequencer tracks (hence tracks).In other words: A preset is a sequence without notes.

In a preset can always be added, resulting in a sequence ofmakes it. The relationship between presets and Seuqenzen looks like this:

Preset

Sound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameterSound +PerformanceParameter

Sequence

Note and Controller Data








Global Effect

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

As you can see is a preset as a "carrier" for note information in eachSequence contained.

Page 141


About TracksThe KS-32 uses the term track for one of the eight internal channels (inSong Mode 16) each have a sound and associated performanceParameters such as volume, pan, controller settings, MIDIChannel keyboard range includes, among other things.

If the KS-32 used as a multi-mode sound generator, and of hisown sequencer is playing, control the sequencer tracks the supplyvarious sounds that are played by the KS-32. Just canSeuqenzer keyboard and external MIDI sound sources on the MIDIControl channels.

If the KS-32 is driven by an external MIDI Seqenzer, let

8 - 3

The different tracks put on different MIDI channelsturn sounds of the KS-32 drive.

Whether that is KS-32 played directly MIDI data to an external devicesending or receiving of a foreign sequencer data, we denotethe combination of MIDI channel, sound and performance parameters asTrack.

Each KS-32 Preset has eight independent, polyphonic tracks by theeight track buttons (Tracks 1-8) can be selected. We see ourselvesmore detail at:• Press Select Seq / preset . Thus, the KS-32 is Seqences / Presets

Select mode.• Press Track 1 The display looks like this.:

Trk01 INT 01

Top Forty Kit

Name of the track sounds

Track number Sound Group Program number

Here you can see the sounds on track 1. With the other track buttonsreach the remaining 7 tracks.

Layers of sounds through the track buttonsIn a preset, a sound with up to 7 other sounds superimposedbe (layering). This allows 8 sounds be stacked, ordistributed by splits the keyboard (Key Range function).To be layered sounds in a preset:• Press Select Seq / preset and one of the eight tracks.• with a quick double on the track button of the sound that

should be taken to, the sound is doubled. DoubledTracks can be identified by flashing its LED. By simply pressing theTrack key can be taken out again each layer.

Page 142


The Replace-track sound button

Exchange of sounds in a trackTo replace the current sound in a track, press theReplace-Track Sound - button, whether the Edit or Select-Sequence / Preset Mode. The Replace-Track Sound - LED flashes. In theDisplay shows the track number, the sound group and theProgram number is stored in the current sound in the track.

Trk01 INT 01

Top Forty Kit

Name of the track sounds

Track number Sound Group Program number

• The Bank and screen buttons you can now replace the sound.In Replace track sound mode, the Bank and screen buttons select newSounds to, rather than sequences, songs or parameters.

• To achieve a sound from another set (INT, ROM, CARDA or B CARD), press repeatedly theBankSet button, or press and hold BankSet and at the same timeBank buttons 1,2,3 or fourth

• To change the displayed track, press either theLeft / right cursor keys or the corresponding track button.

• The Edit Track / Screen 4 (MIDI Program = ###) Page is automaticallyupdated when another sound is copied to a track.

• Press the Replace-Track Sound - button again to the

8 - 4

Replace-track sound mode to leave. The KS-32 returnsin the fashion back where it was before.

Insert a sound effect together withTo add a sound effect along with his program in a track to(which overwrites the previous preset effect) copy,use the function "To Include Effects Hold and press a trackButton " . Clear? No ??? So here it depends on the mode in whichYou are currently in:

From the Sound Mode:• Press the Select Sound button.• Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to

find the one you want to install the current preset.• Press and hold the Replace-track sound button, and while

they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons.

Page 143


• The KS-32 automatically switches to the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, withthe last sound is selected. Its effect is now the new presetEffect. The track of this sound is now the current edit track.

• The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32is still in the Replace-track sound mode. The Bank and Screen -Keys can still be used to replace the sound.By pressing the other track buttons to select other tracks. In theUnlike normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however,always the accompanying effect copied in the preset.

• To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, pressthe Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the selectSound mode back.

From the Sequence / Preset Edit mode• Press the Select Sound button.• Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to

find the one you want to install the current preset.• Press the Edit Seq / Preset button, the KS-32 switches to

Sequence / Preset Edit mode.• Press and hold the Replace-Track Sound - button, and while

they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons.• The selected last in the Select Sound Mode Sound is in the

desired track installed. Its effect will the new preset effect.The selected track will be the new edit track.

• The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32still in Replace mode sound track is. The Bank and Screen -Keys can still be used to replace the sound.By pressing the other track buttons to select other tracks. In theUnlike normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however,always the accompanying effect copied in the preset.

• To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, pressthe Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the selectSound mode back.

From the Select Sequence / Preset Mode:• Press the Select Sound button.• Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to

find the one you want to install the current preset.• Press the Select Seq / Preset button, the KS-32 switches to

Sequence / Preset Select mode.• Press and hold the Replace-track sound T aste, and while

they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons.• The selected last in the Select Sound Mode Sound is in the

desired track installed. Its effect will the new preset effect.However, the layer of the preset state is maintained. In thisWay can the effect setting within a layer combinationchange, without at the state of the individual tracks to change anything.

8-5

• The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32is still in the Replace-track sound mode. The Bank and Screen -Keys can still be used to replace the sound,

Page 144


8-6

here again without changing anything at Layer state of the tracks.In contrast to the normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however,always the accompanying effect copied in the preset. With theLeft / right cursor keys you can select other tracks and alsothere replace the sound in effect, without the LayerInfluencing combination. If you hold a track button directly,changes also the layer combination.

• To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, pressthe Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the SelectSound Mode back.

Effects and PresetsAll eight tracks of a preset share the same effect program. EffectParameters can be under Edit Seq / Preset Effects - Bank (Bank 8)change. The effect of a preset, sequence or songtaken at the first edit of the current sequence. Fits thisnot for all sounds, there are several options:

• Sounds, where the effect does not fit, can be "dry" down;Effect Controls: DRY. (See Edit Track, Screen 3 , later in thisPart.)

• Replace the effect in favor of a less conspicuous programbetter fits all sounds. (See also Part 4 - Effects ).

About Track Performance ParametersEach track has a series of associated performance parameters. ThisParameters control some important parameters for tuning the soundseach other. They can be changed while playing and aretherefore particularly suitable for use on stage or sequencer work.The settings of these parameters are combined with each presetstored. These presets can be called directly in addition to ancommon effect program eight different sounds with theassociated parameters for volume, pitch range, transposeetc. Such settings are stored individually for each trackand remain so after the receive off.

All performance parameters can be accessed via the ten screen buttons on theEdit Track mode so described on the front panel. PressSo the Edit Track - button, followed by the screen buttons to theTo select performance parameters.

The Edit Track parameter are:

Screen # Parameter Description0 Volume Total volume of the track0 Pan Stereo panorama of the track sounds1 Output Bus This sets the assignment2 KeyRange Specifies the key range3 Transpose Transposition of the track

Page 145


4 (MIDI) Channel MIDI channel number of tracks4 (MIDI) Program MIDI program change number5 (MIDI) Status Adjusts the MIDI transmission

8 - 7

6 Pressure Type Aftertouch type for MIDI reception (alsofor transfer of the KS-32 keyboard)

7 Sustain Pedal Governs Sutain pedal (on / off)8 Timbre Programmable sound change9 Release Regulation of the release time

These parameters can be used a complex PerformanceCreate setup for the KS-32 along with other MIDI devices.Thus, the KS-32 is a full-fledged MIDI master keyboard. More about theindividual parameters later in this section.

Layer-LockThe KS-32 usually changes after pressing the Edit Track - buttonthe Sequence / Preset Edit mode. Thereby, the last selected trackselected for editing and only this track will be audible.Normally, the layers of track is in Sequence / Preset Edit modenot possible. Using the Layer-Lock function, however, the currentCombination of gelayerten tracks are dynamically "frozen", sothat performance parameters can change in this state.This allows you to edit performance parameters of a track andat the same time the complete combination of sounds heard, so thatcan be changed relative to each individual sounds.

A track-layer combination "freeze":• Press Select Seq / preset.• Select a track and turn double-other

Tracks to do so.• Press and hold the Select Seq / Preset - button while you press

the Edit Track - button. Now light the Select Seq / Preset and Edit Track -LEDs simultaneously and the KS-32 is thus in the "Layer Lock"Edit track mode. All Edit track are performance-parameter screensas always available either by repeatedly pressing the EditTrack - button, the left / right cursor keys or by"Speed Dial" on the screen - buttons. If you are now one of the track buttonsPress to change so that only the track to be edited, but not theLayer combination.

• To exit the "Layer Lock" Track Edit mode, simply pressany other mode button.

The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) functionsThe Make Default Preset - button performs various tasks, depending onwhether it is called from the sound or Sequence / Preset Mode out.

Page 146


Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset)Press the Sound Mode, make-default preset - button, anew preset produces the lowest free space. If thebeen edited current Seq / preset track parameters before appearsfirst the "Save Changes?" message if you are using the defaultSettings are overwritten. (Remember: The "Save? Changes "message can be selected with the parameter - EditSeq / Preset Control - Bank, Screen 15 ) are suppressed.

The newly created preset according to the default preset Templateis configured, as printed on the front panel of the KS-32.

TrackStatusLOCALLOCALLOCALLOCALKey ZoneFull LowerUpperFull

StatusMIDI MIDIMIDI MIDIKey ZoneFull LowerFull Upper

SoundCurrentPreviousCurrentCurrent

1 2 3 4

Track 5 6 7 8

ChannelBaseBaseBaseBase

ChannelBaseBaseBaseBase

The default preset template is considered as the starting point for MIDIMaster Keyboard applications. It is configured as follows:

8 - 8

• The current sound that you had been selected in the Sound Mode, in theTracks 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 copied. Its effect settings are stored in theESP-chip loaded.

• The penultimate sound that you had been selected in the sound mode is inlanes 2 and 6. This gives you instant access to these soundfor the layer.

• All MIDI channels of the tracks are set to the base channel youunder System • MIDI, Screen 4 can set.

• Tracks 1-4 have MIDI Status = LOCAL.• Tracks 5-8 have MIDI Status = MIDI.• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = LOCAL, appears

Default preset with track. 1• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = BOTH, appears

Default preset layered together with Track 1 and 5.• Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = MIDI or * EXT *

the default preset appears only track. 5• The tracks 3 and 7 have as KeyRange preset A0 - B3. Thus, for

you instantly call up keyboard splits for the lower half of the keyboard,both internally via MIDI.

• The Tracks 4 and 8 have as KeyRange preset C4 - C8. Thus, foryou instantly call up keyboard splits for the upper half of the keyboard - evenagain internally and via MIDI.

• The name of the new preset is first "Sequence ##", where ## of theMemory number corresponds with the preset automaticallyhas been saved. This name can be any time in the Edit Seq / Preset Modeunder Seq Commands, Screen 4 be amended ("Rename SEQ / Pset").

Page 147


If a default preset template is created, it has noTime Signature (Time Signature). If you look like a template, the Record -Button, the first screen appears with the clock prefix, aswould you create a new sequence. After the first shotand pressing the Stop • Continue - key, the query "Keep first### Bars? ", As in the normal mode sequencer. From here behaves theDefault preset template just like any other sequence also.

In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset):Press the Sequence / Preset mode, the make-default preset buttonthe Copy Preset - called function, as shown on the front panel inBrackets. With the Copy Preset - Preset function areData of the current sequence to a * EMPTY SEQ / PSET * or* SONG * EMPTY space copied. The Copy Preset copy functionHowever, no clock information or other unsecured changescurrent parameter settings. It is therefore advisable to copy onlyand then edit the preset copy. The target preset behavesas well as a default preset pattern template , as described above.

If a sequence is selected, you can use the sequence preset data in anyCopy to other free-space sequence. If a song is selected,are accordingly only the free song memory spaces.

To copy preset data in a clear sequence / song spaceselect to any defined sequence. The display shows:

SEQ ## STOP

Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . The display is now "From Preset Seq ##" todisplay the current sequence.

• Press the right cursor button. The display will then:

8 - 9

To Preset =

Seq - ##

You can now use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor -Buttons to input a free pick preset location.

• If you have selected the new position, press the Enter • Save buttonto complete the command. The display briefly shows "command appears"To confirm successful! To execution.

Page 148


8 - 10

The Edit Track Screens

To edit any of the below-described preformance parameters,you first need to edit track - Press the button. The LED above the EditTrack - button lights as a signal that you are in the Edit Track mode.The Edit Seq / Preset - LED also lights as a reminder that the EditTrack mode is a subset of the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. PushOne of the bank buttons, the corresponding Sequence / Preset appearsEdit Mode screen.

ET0 Edit Track

Volume / PanPress Edit Track / Screen 0th

In the top row of the display is the preset or sequence number,the number of the selected track and the playback status.

PRESET 01 Trk1 -

V = 99 Pan = SOUND

Space Track # Play Status

Vol - VolumeThe Volume screen the volume for each track can be regulatedbe to the KS-32 internally and with expanders in the mixturevote.

Range: 0 to 99

All tracks whose MIDI status is set to MIDI or BOTH, send MIDIVolume data (controller 7) with exactly the displayed value whenthis parameter is edited. Send sequencer and preset tracksAlso, the set volume when a sequence or a presetis selected.

Pan - PanoramaThe Pan-Sceen the sound of a track is assigned to the stereo image.

If a track on SOUND, the panoramic setting from the truecorresponding sound program, as described in the Edit Sound, Output -Bank has been set. Any other setting overrules thisSetting and ALL voices are treated equally.

Range: -98 (far left) to +99 (far right). +00 Is exactly the middle inStereo image. The lowest value is SOUND - the original settingthe sound will be input.


8-11

ET1

OutputEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 1

PRESET 01 Trk1 -

Output = CONTROL

OutputNormally, the different voices of the sound are the three effectallocated for. On this screen, you can exceed this preference. vote This is especially useful when the effect in a performancePreset does not match any of the sounds.The possible settings are:• DRY all voices run dry by the effect.• FX1 sets FX2 Voices on FX1; FX1 and DRY are not affected.• FX2 sets FX1 Voices on FX2; FX2 and DRY are not affected• VOICE the normal setting of the sound is maintained.• CONTROL the normal setting of the sound is maintained.

Controller data is fed to the effect part. This isautomatic adjustment when a sound is imported.

ET2

KeyRangeEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 2

PRESET 01 Trk1 -

KeyRange = C2 C8

Low Key High Key

Key-RangeEach track has its own range in which sounds like his sound. WithThese parameters can be used to implement simple key splits, tocomplex master-keyboard setups. With Key Range determines whichNotes via MIDI-transmitted or processed locally in the KS-32.

You can split the keyboard up to eight times by all eight tracksprogram for each one zone. In addition, these zones can alsoany overlap, which can result in interesting sound mixes.

Area: A0 to C8

Page 150


The following figure shows an example of how three tracks withvarying range overlap, the piano is mixed andpartially overlapped by the cello (below) and flute (above).

Cellos FlutePiano

8-12

To edit the range of a track:• Press Edit Track, Screen2. The value for the lowest key flashes.• Play your desired deepest button. Then flashes auto-

cally the parameters for high-key.• Play the desired highest key. Both new values are now

the display and the flashing stops.• If you want to change the setting, select the parameter

meter just back on and try again.

A change of the tonal range does not affect the playback ofSequencer track (although it has influence on the recording). SequencerTracks always play everything is included, no matter how the soundscope of this track is set. To note ranges from aRemove sequencer track, use the "Erase Key Range"Function in the Edit Seq / Preset, track Commands -Bank (See Section 10 -Sequence edit functions) .

Warning : If you have accidentally set the highest among the lowest key isthe track can not be heard. To correct this, select the Key RangeParameters again and set the limits again.

ET3

TransposeEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 3

Halftone

PRESET 01 Trk2 -

Transpose = + 0 +00

Octave

TransposeEach track is in his pitch in octave or semitonechanged (transposed) are. This is true both for their own voicesthe KS-32, as well as sent via MIDI notes.

Page 151


Area: Octave parameter -4 To +4 octavesHalftone parameters -11 To +11 semitones

In Sequencer mode can use the Transpose parameter in all tracksReal time be transposed without manipulated the data directly in the tracklose.

Warning : You should make sure that you track the status of MIDI or BOTHhave never transpose while keys are pressed or theSequencer is running. This could lead to "hanging notes" - that sounds,where the "Note Off" event is missing.

ET4

MIDI ChannelEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 4

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Chan = 03 Prog = 001

MIDI channel MIDI program number

Chan - MIDI ChannelWith this screen, you choose which MIDI channel the trackSending or receiving data. It is important to understand the difference,

8-13

how this parameter on sending and receiving determined. CompareSee also the information about System • MIDI Edit mode andSequencer practice.

Transmit Determines are on which MIDI channel data sent.MIDI data is only sent when the track theMIDI Status BOTH, MIDI or * EXT * has.

Receive Determines on which MIDI channel for a specificSequencer track MIDI data is received when underSystem • MIDI, Screen 6 "MIDI Mode = MULTI or MONO B"is selected.

In POLY or MONO-A mode, the KS-32 always receivesno matter what set at its base channel in the trackshas been. Individual preset tracks do not receive ondifferent MIDI channels. For the presets is a pureTransmission function.

Range: MIDI channels 1 to 16

Note: If more than one track to the same MIDI channel have only receives theTrack with the lowest number.

Page 152


ET4

MIDI ProgramEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 4

Prog - MIDI program numberWith this screen, you can determine which program changecommand is sent via MIDI when the track is selected. If theMIDI track status to "LOCAL", no program is for this trackalternately sent. If a different track, preset, a different sequence orSelected song sends the KS-32 program change commands for Trackswith status BOTH, MIDI or * EXT *.

Usually appears the number of the internal KS-32 sounds here. ThisNumber is set automatically when a sound from the Sound Bankis selected. Will replace track sound a new sound in aTrack used, thus automatically change the program number.

You can at this point, any other MIDI programEnter the number and thus overrides the default. As a result, changesAlthough the sound of a connected MIDI device, but not theinternal KS-32 sound. This is a handy way combinations ofinternal and external sounds to try.

Range: 001-128 (MIDI program numbers 0 to 127)

Program change in the KS-32The sounds in the different groups are all sound the programnumbers 000 - 079 associated, said at the MIDI Out of the KS-32 alsoMIDI Bank Select messages and special ENSONIQ -Bank"Tax" Program Change message is sent when the Sound Group(INT, ROM, or CARD A CARD B) is changed.

• Internal RAM Sounds (INT banks) have the numbers 001 bis 079th• Cartridge programs (CRT banks) have the numbers 001 bis 079th• Internal ROM programs (ROM banks) have also number 001 to079th• The drum sounds send the program numbers 080-099.

ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change commandsThe manner, such as program changes from the KS-32 are received,is somewhat more complicated than in some other systems, because the KS-32the number of sounds available immediately to the possible MIDIProgram change far exceeds. Therefore, the KS-32 uses the last

8 - 14

four program change messages (124-127) to determine howto understand the following program changes are (the numbers refer toagain on the MIDI messages actually sent). The followingTable shows the effect of these four special commands:

Page 153


8-15

for Program select the following programChange Currency: Change Currency:124 000..079 - INT Sounds125 000..079 - ROM Sounds126 000..079 - CARD A Sounds127 000..079 - CARD B sounds

These particular "control" commands always need only onceto be sent. All of the following program changes are just astreated again to follow such a command.

Note : Program Change 080 -099 choose always at the ready drum kit.

Selecting a new sequence / song effect via MIDIThere is a special command under the program change only theMULTI mode is processed. With him are sound and effectcalled together and placed in the respective track. If aProgram Change 123 on any of the selected MIDI channelsis received, takes the subsequent program changes thecorresponding effect of the sound simultaneously with, and replaces theprevious sequence or song effect. This is the only way to automaticallyChange effects in a song, unless by hand or byCalling another sequence. This can be useful when theKS-32 operates with an external sequencer.

This special program change 123 has no effect on howother program changes are understood. If one of the "tax" -Program change numbers for the same sound used to send thisbetween the 123er and the actual exchange program.

Note : All KS-32 program changes are displayed 001-128 andprocessed, transmitted via MIDI, however, as 000 to 127.

ET5

MIDI StatusEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 5

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Status = BOTH

Page 154


8-16

MIDI StatusThis screen determines the MIDI status of a track. The four possibilitiesoptions are:• BOTH buttons, controller etc. are transferred internally and via MIDI.

Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds.

LOCAL • The track plays only internal sounds and does not send via MIDI.Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds.

• MIDI Buttons, controller, etc. are sent via MIDI, if on theKeyboard is played. However, internal sounds are notcontrolled. Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds.This status is with the LOCAL OFF other Keyboardscomparable. Use this level when they are pureWant to have MIDI tracks, except for the sequencer ordirect playing of expanders. Is the MIDI status for aTrack active, the display instead of the program name"MIDI CHAN #" to show which channel justis sent. (Assuming the parameter MIDI TRACKNAMES under System • MIDI, Screen 9 is OFF; seePart 3 - System • MIDI settings ).

• * * EXT Like the MIDI status, except that incomingMIDI data not be processed. This is useful whenthe KS-32 Keyboard Box as an external sequenceris used with different expanders. In addition,you mute tracks with this status when the KS-32used as a multi-mode tone in MULTI modewill. As a result, the number of channels can be reduced tothe KS-32 reacts.

The table below summarizes again, like what status acts:

Track status = BOTH LOCAL MIDI * EXT *

The keyboard sends MIDI

The keyboard plays the internal sounds

Sequencer tracks (Play pressed)play internal sounds

Sequencer tracks (Play pressed)play via MIDI

Incoming MIDI data play internal sounds

Yes

NoYes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

YesNo

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Page 155


ET6

PressureEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 6

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Pressure = CHANNEL

Pressure - AftertouchThe Pressure Screen gives them the opportunity for each track theAftertouch way to determine. This parameter determines whichAftertouch kind received by each track. It also controls whetherAftertouch to be sent internally or externally. Remember: TheKeyboard of the KS-32 sends only channel aftertouch received are

8-17

However, channel aftertouch and polyphonic aftertouch via MIDI.

• NONE - There are no aftertouch receive data in the sequencerrecorded or transmitted from the keyboard of the KS-32.

• KEY - In this mode, the KS-32 receives the most expressive probablyMIDI controller - polyphonic aftertouch. This means that IndependentModulation for each key. Is a sequencer track-KEY setare polyphonic aftertouch data from an external MIDI keyboard inSequencer recorded, not when the corresponding sound thisrecycled. When set to KEY the keyboard of the KS-32 does not sendAftertouch.

• CHANNEL - This is the ordinary aftertouch, the ChannelAftertouch. With channel aftertouch always be all tones of aModulated chord, even if only a key is pressed stronger. Howthe Mod is Channel Aftertouch also a "global" controller,acting on the entire keyboard. If a sequencer track onCHANNEL is transmitted channel aftertouch from the KS-32 Keyboard andrecorded by the sequencer and use MIDI to eachMIDI channel routed.

To determine what type of aftertouch processes a MIDI device,you should look at its MIDI implementation detail. Bestset the KS-32 exactly as the receiving MIDI device.

Page 156


ET7

SustainEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen. 7

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Sustain = ON

Sustain PedalThe Sustain parameter determines which tracks the sustain pedalreact and what not. This affects the angechlossene pedal(FtswR = SUSTAIN under System • MIDI, Screen 2 ) exactly as shownincoming MIDI sustain data (controller # 64). There are twoPositions: ON and OFF.

• ON Sustain data affect all notes in the range of that track.• OFF Sustain data has no effect in this track.

It would be useful, for example, the sustain data from a bass trackfilter out (OFF) if you have programmed a keyboard split.Then you can play the bass staccato (because the Sustain parameter forThis track is set to OFF), while the chords in the upper keyboardHalf can be kept with the pedal.

ET8

TimbreEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen 8

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Timbre = 00

8-18

TimbreThe timbre parameter is an easy way to sound characterto change a sound, without directly intervene in the sound parameters tohave. This performance parameters using the data entry controlor Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to control all companiessound different aspects, depending on how the programmerhas used the modulator.

Page 157


As timbral modulation source can be used at any location whereModulation sources can be freely addressed. Timbre with para-parameters such as filter cutoff, waveform modulation LFO intensity orothers are connected. It is worth experimenting with this parameter,to see how the programmer has used it.

Area: 00 to 99

All tracks with MIDI Status MIDI, * EXT * or BOTH transmit aMIDI control message controller (controller # 71) with the correspondingValue if this parameter is changed.

ET9

ReleaseEdit Track Press Edit Track / Screen 9

PRESET 01 Trk01-

Release = +00

ReleaseThe release parameter gives you the option of the release time of aTo increase sound in a track or decrease ("Release" is theDecay of the sound after the key is released). This becomesespecially good if you want to change the release time of a soundwithout having to engage in the actual sound parameters.

Area: -64 To +64 Higher values increase the release time.Lower values reduce the release time.

All tracks with MIDI Status MIDI, * EXT * or BOTH transmit aMIDI control message controller (controller # 72) with the correspondingValue if this parameter is changed.

8-19

Page 158Page 159

KS-32 user guide Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

9-1

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

• In this part of the sequencer of the KS-32 is presented with allInformation that you need to work with the sequencer tocan. More specific functions in Section 10 - Sequencer EditFunctions treated.

Introduction - What you need to know about presets ................................. 9-1Digital sequencer ................................................ ................................... 9 - 2What is a Sequence? .................................................. ............................ 9 - 3What's that sound? .................................................. ................................... 9 - 3The sequencer "drive functions" ............................................ ......... 9-4The sequencer status .............................................. ................................. 9-5Sequencer and Song benches ............................................. ......................... 9-5

Selecting a sequence / a song ............................................ .... 9-6Playing a sequence / a song ............................................ 9-6

How to create a new sequence ............................................ .............. 9-7How to create a new songHow to delete the entire sequencer memory ................................. 9-8Recording a sequence ............................................... ........................... 9 - 9"Punch In" in a track ........................................... ............................... 9-11Play an active sequence / try Sounds .................... 9-12Recording MIDI tracks ............................................. ..................... 9-12Track volume functions - mixing, mute, solo ......... 9-13The Song Mode .............................................. ........................................ 9-15

Effect - switching in Song mode ........................................... 9-15Song Tracks ............................................... ................................... 9-17Sequence control of tracks in the Song Mode .......................... 9-18Blending sequence and song tracks in Song Mode ....... 9-19Notes to the mixdown mode ............................................ 9 - 20

Introduction - What you need to know about presetsENSONIQ was the first company to a versatile multi-track sequencerhas built into a synthesizer. The KS-32 with its 16 trackSequencer is the logical further development of this technology. The KS-32 sequencer offers some ways youlikely to be of a computerized software sequencerwould expect. The KS-32 connects with the advantages ofthe integrated system.

The KS-32 is despite its high performance easy to use - youhave your synthesizers, sequencers, and your MIDI master keyboard directlyat your fingertips in a single device. This makes ENSONIQ ' s contributionfor digital music recording so intuitive and efficient.

If you are the same entered with this chapter because it does notcan be expected to work with the sequencer, you should stillback again, scroll and Part 8 - Presets read. Contains the preset partimportant information about tracks (tracks), and the setting ofPerformance and MIDI parameters together an important Vorraus-requisite for the understanding of the sequencer is.

Page 160

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics KS-32 user guide

Therefore, we recommend that you first read the section "Presets", andthen familiarize yourself with the sequencer other parameters in thisPart to be treated. That is the only way to get the right accessFind this versatile element of the KS-32.

Digital SequencerMultitrack tape recorders have numerous band tracks that you magneticcan record shows complex information. A sequencer

9-2

simulates this by musical information into a computerStore "picks up". If these sequencer - tracks played, canthe recorded information about your family either through the internal soundthe KS-32, but also be played via external MIDI devices.Expander with multi-mode then you can even multiple sounds simultaneouslyPlay on different channels, then each channel has a trace ofSequencer takes over.

A sequencer only records "commands" instead of real toneson. This means that the recording draws no loss of sound by itself, no matteras is often dubbed a track or reinstated.

It is important that you always have in mind that a sequencer onlyrecording what you play. The memory of the sequencer to workbased on events (key press, modulation, program changes, etc.),while the memory of a tape (the tape that is) alwaysa fixed recording time is bound.

That is, a sequencer needed for 100 notes always the sameSpace, whether you're minutes these notes in one or tenhave played. When you press a key, the sequencer records aCommand keystroke (key down) on. Then, the time is measured,until you release the key. Then there is a command for theReleasing (Key Up). The time between two events thus has noEffect on the memory consumption. Compare that with aTape machine. When tape is time always the deciding factor. Italways requires the same amount of tape for a minute, regardless of whether orhundred notes have been played.

You could say the band is working linear, it is after a fixed timeconsumed - while a sequencer memory is dynamic - it isuses only as much as is required. If this differencehave understood, it will be easier, with the sequencerdeal with it. For example, while relatively little note eventsSpace consuming, controller information (such as pitch bend,Modulation or aftertouch) always a flood of Events for theSequencer, which can consume memory very quickly. When youSo you want to try one more track to be incorporated into a sequencetake, if only little space is left, you know that youneed to save more with controllers.

Page 161


What is a Sequence?A sequence in the KS-32 is a combination of eight independentTracks and an effects program. Each track has its own soundand a set of different track parameters (volume, pan, MIDIChannel, etc.) which are stored together with the sequence.

A sequence is (although the change of a fixed length at any timeleaves), which is determined by the length of the first shot. Anexisting sequence can be as long or short as you want (withinthe limits of the memory of course).

Each sequence has a 16-digit name entered when creatingcan be. Dieer name at any time in the Seq Commands - Bank( Bank 4 ) can be changed in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode.

If you select a new sequence, each track sends a MIDIProgram change message on his MIDI channel, as well as a MIDILoudness information, unless the track status is set to LOCAL.

What's that sound?In the Song mode are sequences in individual steps (Steps) to aSong linked. A song can consist of 99 steps consist, in turn, each99 reps may have. Within a step may Tracksbe transposed or muted.

9-3

But a song of the KS-32 is much more than a chain of sequences. EachSong has another eight more tracks that are completely independent of theTracks in the sequences.

Each song track has its own sound and all track / performanceParameters, as well as a sequence track. The length of the song tracksarises from the overall length of the steps and the number of repetitionments that make up the song. You can song tracks on the track buttonsSelect when a song is active.

This means that if you added a couple of sequences and tohave linked a song, you can still eight more linear tracksrecord the length of the entire song. You have 16 tracks,with which you can work (more about this in the section on song tracks).

Page 162


The sequencer "drive functions"The three buttons below the Sequencer area to work as start, stop andRecord buttons of the sequencer. In addition to these three buttonsto the supplied footswitch (SW-6) or the additional switchof the SW 5 / SW-10 Doppelfußpedals (accessory) for starting and stopping theUse the sequencer when all hands are free ( see Part 3 -System • MIDI Control) .

Record Stop Play

Aux. Foot SwitchContinue

If the auto punch feature is turned off,

• is play the currently selected sequence or song from the beginningstarted.

• is the sequencer with Stop • Continue stopped (by pressing the keysuppressed when the sequencer is running) or the sequencer will play aspecific point on (when the key at a standstill sequenceris pressed).

• The foot switch performs the function of Stop • Continue, button.• Press play and to record , the sequencer starts over with

recording.• Press Stop and Record , the sequencer of the site begins to

record where it was last stopped.• Press Record , while the sequencer is running, it switches to

"Punch In" mode and starts recording as soon as you startplay.

If the auto punch function is activated, the sequencer takes only withinhalf of the points on which under the Edit Times in Locate set -Bankhave been.

9-4

Page 163


9-5

The sequencer statusIn many sequencer Banks is in the upper right corner of the displayinformation about the sequencer status . The sequencer is locatedalways in one of these states:

• STOP - The sequencer is• PLAY - The currently selected sequence is running (sequence selected)• SNGS - Song Stop: The sequencer is (song selected)• SNGP - Song Play: The currently selected song is played (song selected)• REC - first record on the selected track• ODUB - Overdub: is on a recorded track another shot

made• play (lower line) - The count is running before the sequencer in PLAY

REC or ODUB changes• rec (lower line) - Record-Standby mode: Once you play

start the sequencer enters REC (only in the first frame)• odub (lower line) - "punch-in" Standby: When you play

start the sequencer switches ODUB• MREC (lower line) - MIDI sync recording standby mode: same as above

is the sequencer in recording standby, however, byMIDI sync (CLOCK = MIDI Control in the bank) and expectedMIDI clock data so that the recording starts.

• audp - Audition Play. In this status the sequencer switchesautomatically when the end of the sequence is reached (providedLOOP = ON). Then the sequence proceeds, together with the newTrack, until you stop • Continue or enter • Save button. In theDisplay is then "Press ENTER to keep track NEW."

• AUDS - Audition Stop: Appears when out of Audition Playstop the sequencer. In order for this control status in the normalTo come Mode, you must tell the KS-32 First is that the newTo keep recording (See also PLAY / KEEP screen later inthis part).

Sequencer and Song benchesIf the Select Seq / preset press button takes you to theSequences / Presets Select mode. Now you can about the ten Bank -Buttons (numbered 0 to 9) sequences or select songs. TheBanks 0 to 6 can always choose to sequences while the pews 7 to 9, theSongs included. Each bank ten places for sequences / presets /Songs that on the screen buttons below the bank keysbe called.

Memory locations that contain no sequences or songs are with,"* EMPTY SEQ / PSET" or "EMPTY SONG" marked. In theupper line shows the position of the current sequence / the songs / presets inMemory.

If you select an empty location and enter • Save buttonthe function "Create New Sequence" or "Create New Song"called (see later in this section).

Page 164


9-6

Selecting a sequence / a song• Press Select Seq / preset , and then a bank key, numbered

from 0 to 9 to a Sequence / Song Bank to select.• Press the Screen button 0-9 to a sequence or song

to select the bank.

Playing a sequence / a songSelect a sequence, then press the Play button in the sequencerPart. The sequence is running out.

SEQ 00 Tempo = 120

Sequence 01_

Space of the current sequence

Name of the sequencewhich will follow

Flashing cursor

While a sequence is running, you can already select the next. In thebottom line of the display then the name of the new sequence.Only when the old sequence is quite expired, the sequencer switches tonew sequence. Now the display changes in the upper left corner.In this manner, sequences can be real-time supply anysocialize, while the sequencer is running. In the display you can always see whichSequence is currently playing (top left), and what follows (lower line).

Note that just for a change of the effect of outputis interrupted in order to load the new algorithm.

Page 165


How to create a new sequenceA new sequence is constructed as follows:

• Press the Select Seq / Preset button in the Sequence / PresetsSelect to access mode.

• The Bank and screen buttons to select a still empty storagespace to. Remember, though, that the banks 0 to 6 and 7 to 9 sequencesSongs included. The display looks like this:

PRESET ## LOC = ##

* EMPTY SEQ / PSET *

• Press the Enter • Save - button. The display will then:

9-7

New Sequence

Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttonsYou can now scroll through all the empty memory slots.• Have you found a job, press the right cursor . In the

Display shows:

Time Signature =

4.4

With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor area to set the time signature. With theRight cursor reached the second value. Again Right Cursoror Enter • Save button and the display shows:

New Name =

Sequence ##

Again, use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor buttons to enter a name for the new sequence.

• Now that you have space, time signature and name for the new sequencefound, press only once Enter • Save to theProcess to complete. The display will then: "Command Successful!"

Page 166


How to create a new song:• Press the Select Seq / Preset button in the sequencer / Presets

Select to access mode.• The Bank and screen buttons to select a free song memory

to (banks 7-9).• Press the Enter • Save button. The display shows:

New Song

Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttonsYou can now all empty song presets scroll (with anew sequence, these are the empty sequence presets).

• Have you found a job, press the right cursor. In theDisplay shows:

New Name =

Song ##

Again, use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor buttons to enter a name for the new song.

• Now that you have space, time signature and name for the new songfound, press only once Enter • Save to theProcess to complete. The display will then: "Command Successful!"

How to delete the entire sequencer memoryIf you want to delete all sequences and songs in the KS-32,

9-8

If you want to delete all sequences and songs in the KS-32,make sure first that you show all important data of aHave secured card or via MIDI. Then:

• Press Edit Seq / preset , if you do not already in the sequencer EditFashion is. The LED above the button lights up.

• Select by Bank 1 , the control - to the Bank.• Press the Touch Screen 7 - button. The display will read: "Press ENTER to Reinit

Sequencer "• Press Enter • Save . The KS-32 asks: "Erase Sequencer

Memory? "• Press Up • Yes or Enter • Save . The KS-32 removes all presets,

Sequences and songs. Then again the empty sequence and a blankSong in the memory locations 00 and 70. (It is always a sequence anda song in memory).

Page 167


Recording a sequenceHere we will describe how a new sequence from scratcharises. First, we focus on the sequencer for the KS-32alone. Then follows the treatment of external MIDI devices.

1) Create a new sequence:• Follow the instructions here in this part, as a new sequence

is applied.• Press one of the track buttons. The display now reads:

Trk01 INT 01

<Sound name>

2) Selecting a track:• Track 1 is already defined and selected (a track is always

selected), and with the current sound is. All other tracksare still -UNDEFINED- (not defined).

• To start recording on another track as track 1,press the appropriate track button. This will turn this trackdefined and also occupied with the current sound. Otherwise you keepSimply Track 1 and start from there with the recording.

3) Looking from a matching sound:• Press the Replace-Track Sound - button.• Select a sound quite normal on the bench and Screen -

Buttons as you also do it otherwise. Each new sound is immediately to theTrack taken over and replaces the previous one.

• Press the Replace-track sound button again to theReplace-track sound mode to leave.

4) Check the "click" and "Countoff" Settings:• Press Edit Seq / preset . Select the Click -Bank of ( Bank 2 )

and then Screen 0 . On this screen, the built-in metronomeset. Select the "click" parameter and set"Click = RECORD" field. Then the metronome is only while recordinghear.

• Go to the Countoff screen by the Locate buttonpress ( Bank 1 ) and then Screen 0 . Set "Countoff = RECORD"a. Then listen to before each shot one bar count.

5) recording the first track:The length of the first track sets the length of the sequence. That'S Whythis recording is a little different from all of the following.• Press and hold the Record button firmly and press play it. The Click

Track can be heard now. The first quarter of each measure is emphasized. TheTempo parameter is automatically selected.

9-9

Page 168


9 - 10

• Adjust the tempo ( Data Entry knob or Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor ). The clock. with which you began, the clock is automatically 1Sequence.

• Press Stop • Continue (or additional footswitch) to theTo stop recording. The display will read "Keep Trk1 first ## bars?".

• Press Up • Yes cursor , if you want to keep track. The setsautomatically and the length of the sequence determined, or

• Press Down • No-cursor to delete the track again andstart again.

6) Record Other Tracks:If you have decided to * YES *, of which all furtherRecord the same scheme, including track 1. The length of theSequence is now defined (by the length of the first track). Allfollowing tracks will automatically have the same length.

• Press the Track 2 - button and select a second track (orlet the first one if you want to re-record). The nameand all the track parameters of the previous tracks are taken there.

• Find out a sound. As described in step 3, you canReplace with the sound feature the sound of your choice into the active tracecopy.

• Press and hold the Record button is pressed while you press the Play -Button to start recording. It starts with a one bar(Assuming Countoff = RECORD or CLICK) count-in and theSequencer switches to Record mode. All you will playwas added until:1) is reached at the end of the sequence, or 2) the Stop • Continue buttonpress (or additional footswitch).

• At the end of the sequence, the KS-32 enters the Audition Play Mode(If loop = ON). Now appears the Keep OLD / NEW screen:

Press ENTER to

KEEP NEW TRACK

• If the Down • No cursor , press button, you will hear the track, asit was before the last shot. The display then is "OLD" instead"NEW". This is especially useful when trying to distinguish between oldcompare and new version before you decide which one yoube retained.

• Press the Up • Yes-cursor to hear your new recording.• If you enter • Save button while the display shows "OLD", the

retain old version and the new moves in the trash. Was the trackpreviously empty, then it is empty again.

• If you enter • Save button while "NEW" appears in the display iskeep the new version and everything else replaces it.

Page 169


The Keep OLD / NEW screen appears after each shot and after eachEdit operation. So you always have the opportunity to comparebefore you have to decide. You will notice that this is a veryoutstanding feature of the KS-32 is, if you at a receptionworks.

"Punch In" in a track

9-11

"Punch In" in a trackThe KS-32 provides two ways to insert into a track record("Punch In"). If the Auto Punch function is set to Off, you cando this manually by playing. If Auto Punch "On", goes the KS-32automatically into the receptacle over, at the point in the Locate -Bankis defined (see auto punch in this part).

To enter manually into the receptacle (Auto Punch = OFF):

• Press the Track button for the track you want to record.• Press Play to play the sequence or the song.• Press Record . The KS-32 is now on standby overdub -

"Odub" appears at the top right of the display and the sequencer waitsYour use.

• Begin to play whenever you want. Once you beginchanges the KS-32 in the recording and record what you play,where everything was before the punch-in is maintained. WithStop • Continue or Aux foot switch you can start recordingcancel. Then after that old material is preserved.

• Press Stop • Continue . Then appears the Keep NEW / OLDScreen, you have seen it before. You can now againcompare the old and new version before you decidewhich to keep.

To automatically get on or off in a track (when in Control -Bank AUTO PUNCH = ON):

• Set the Locate the punch-in and punch-out points a -Bank, soas described in the corresponding place.

• Press Record / Play to start the sequencer. The sequence isplayed without data record, up to the defined Punch InPoint. You can play up to that point already.

• If the punch-in point is reached, the sequencer automatically switches to theRecording. Now, everything you play, taken toPunch-out point.

• When you reach the punch-out point of the sequencer switches toKeep checking the NEW / OLD screen.

• you compare again before you decide what savedshould be.

Page 170


If Auto Punch is turned on, only within the setRecorded points. No matter how you shoot. If you, for example,Play press, and then only record , the KS-32 is ready for your firstNotes before it goes into the recording. But even then only withinthe locate points. Outside these limits will not be included.

If you selected Record mode LOOPED, while carSwitched Punch, the sequencer increases with each iteration ofA sequence at the locate points and out, until you stop • Continuepush.

Note: When the foot is defined as the START / STOP footswitchcan be played by the sequencer overdub standby mode ("odub"lowercase) with the foot in the overdub record modeswitch ("ODUB" uppercase). This way you can "free-hand"enter without a defined punch-in / out time in the recording.

Play an active sequence / try SoundsEvery time you switch from sequencer mode in the Sound Mode(By pressing the Select Sound button press), invites the KS-32 the effectthis sounds into the effects processor. The sequence effect isreplaced. (Remember, though, that only one effect for all soundsis possible, even if you can determine the assignment individually.)If you select Sound button while the sequencer is running, or

9-12

Sound Mode Play button you will hear the sequence with the effect ofSounds. (The sequence is not changed, but you canSequence with different effects listening.)

If you now but when the sequencer is running in the Sequence / Preset fashionSwitch sounds, but the effect of the first sound is maintained.You also have the sequencer sounds by doubleon the track be layered buttons. So you can create a melody with severalSounds to play the current sequence.

It is recommended that the Replace sound feature to use if you are atwant to change the sequencer sounds, which you can then live toplay. Please read Part 8 - Presets .

Recording MIDI tracksWhen you have made all the settings, you can also MIDITracks record, as well as tracks with LOCAL or BOTH status.Tracks that are sent via MIDI will be treated the same way asinternal tracks. Also apply to the working steps in advancethis section are described. So stick to this way of workingeven with MIDI tracks.

Page 171


For each new MIDI track:1) Define the MIDI settings in the parameter bank,2) Take the track on, and3) Are you looking to Keep the NEW / OLD-screen version of the best.

MIDI tracks using the track are layered together buttons. OneYou can in the mute tracks - Bank ( Bank 7 ) mute, just asother tracks. The Edit Track parameters such as volume, Key RangeTranspose and can be used for MIDI tracks.

Note: They will often take sequences with MIDI and LOCAL tracks.Then be sure that tracks only to play internal sounds,is always set to LOCAL (rather than BOTH). To avoid that MIDITone generator undesirable play.

Track volume functions - mixing, mute, soloIf you have taken a couple tracks, be sure theCorrect mix of tracks or sometimes one or two trackswant to listen alone. This is done in the mute tracks -Bank.

Select a track with the track buttons and then press EditTrack . The KS-32 is now in the track edit mode. Now pressthe Screen 0 button. The display shows:

SEQ 00 Trk01 -

V = 99 Pan = SOUND

From this screen, you can use the volume ratios of the individualCustomize tracks your sequence. Press one after the respectiveTrack buttons, and then adjust the volume.

Press the mute tracks - Bank button ( Bank 7 ) about the trackTo achieve Mute parameter. Here, the individualTracks mute or solo hear.

SEQ 00 Trk01 -

Status = -PP-M-PM

9-13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Track

Page 172


9-14

Press a track button or use the left / rightCursor keys to select a track for editing. The data-Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons you can nowindividual tracks to mute or solo switch. P is called Play, M stands for Muteand S means Solo (see also the treatment of the track-mute status inPart 10 - Programming sequencer for further details).

Page 173


9-15

The song modeThe song mode opens the door to the true qualities of the KS-32 asKeyboard Studio . In the Song mode can be individual sequencesstrung together. A Song consists of steps - each with a sequenceand the information how often this is to be repeated, and whichTraces on or should be switched off. In addition, each trackbe transposed. As Song steps are edited, is in part 10 -Sequencer programming .

But that's not all: Each KS-32 song also has its ownEffects setup (see below) and eight additional tracks that of theSequence tracks are completely independent. You have a total of16 tracks. You can decide for yourself what you want in aRecord sequence and what was added later in a song trackshould be. The song tracks are described on the following page.

Effect - switching in Song modeAs you will have already noticed, there is always a smallDelay when you switch from one sound to another,thereby the effect changes. The reason is that the effect of a processorMoment needed to change the algorithm. New softwareInformation to be loaded here.

The same thing happens when you switch sequences. Each sequence has aown effects setup. If you select a sequence, the other aUsed effect, there is also a brief interruption.

When you play a song that can be a problem - hasa new song step a different effect, there is a brief interruptiontion to the audio outputs. For this problem, the KS-32 holds afew solutions available.

The parameter "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES / SONG" in theControl Bank determines which effect can be heard in a song:• When "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES" is set, at

each new song step, the effect of the relevant sequence loaded, whicha brief interruption brings with it (unless both sequenceshave the same basic program).

• When "song Uses effect from = SONG" is set, the effect is thewas saved with the song, the same for all sequencesused.

So: a song - an effect = no interruptions.

This parameter setting is saved along with the songchert. When you create a new song is first "song uses Effectfrom = SONG "set. As a result, interruptions can be prevented.But then all sequences have the same effect.

Page 174


If you "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES" selected as the settinghave, you can still avoid interruptions:• Use whenever possible the same effect basic program for

each sequence in the song. Even with different parameter settings.• Program the beginning of the sequence in which the effect of changes,

a short break or you used a one-bar empty sequence, the onlythe effect is changed. For all of the following sequences, they choose the sameEffect.

9-16

Page 175


Song TracksA song in the KS-32 is more than just a chain of sequences. Do You Haveonce consecutively set a sequence of sequences can providerecord eight tracks over the length of the entire song. This SongTracks are independent of the other tracks: They have their ownSounds and track parameters. The length of the song tracks depends on theLength from the song.

Let's say you have designed a song, as in Part 10described. In our example, we take the simplest case:• You have added three sequences, each recorded with eight tracks

and combines them into a song.• Step 1 sequence 01 (4 bars long) with a repetition;• Step 2 sequence is 02 (8 bars long) and runs from once;• Step 3 sequence is 03 (4 bars long) with a repetition.

This song would look like this:

Sequence Track 1Sequence Track 2Sequence Track 3Sequence Track 4Sequence Track 5Sequence Track 6Sequence Track 7Sequence Track 8



Sequence 1 Sequence 3Sequence 2

Song length

If you have selected the song, you can use the track buttons awhole new set with eight other tracks to see. These are the song tracks.(If you are not sure what you see, pay attention to the trackLEDs. You blink when displayed Sequence tracks in Song Modebe). This song tracks look like this:

9-17

Song length

SequenceTracks




Sequence 1 Sequence 3Sequence 2Song

Song Track 1Song Track 2Song Track 3Song Track 4Song Track 5Song Track 6Song Track 7Song Track 8

SongTracks

Song tracks are treated exactly as Sequence tracks whose lengthequivalent to the length of all the sequences that make up the song.The length of a song track, the length of the song at the time when

Page 176


the first song track was recorded. If you subsequently theChange song and change the length, it has no more influence on theLength of the song tracks. The also remains the same.• You can check the sound of a song tracks as usual with the REPLACE

Track sound function switch.• You can normally receive (with Record and Play ). Align

As per the explanations in this section. The only difference is thata song track is always associated with the whole song.

• You can edit song tracks with all edit-track features inPart 8 will be described. Select an Edit Track function from theSong mode out the corresponding song track is edited.

• From the Mute -Track -Bank you can also solo- or Song Tracksmute, just as in Sequence tracks.

Sequence control of tracks in the Song modeIf a song is on that determine the "Song Edit Tracks display settingplayed "parameter in the Control - Bank, which on the track and giant screensEdit track parameters can be seen.

• If you have "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SONG" is set,be on the track and Edit Track giant screens displayed song tracks.All changes apply only to the song tracks.

• If you select "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SEQ," have set arethe tracks of the individual sequences shown, from which the songthere. Any changes to these tracks are not taken,when the next song step follows. If you are basically a sequencewant to change, you must select the right sequence and then theChange parameters.

If a song is on, and "Song Edit Tracks Displayed SEQ =" setflashed the track LEDs in order to remind you that the track datathe currently selected sequence to be changed, and not the song tracks.Song tracks as tracks # 9 - 16 shown.

Note: There is a shortcut to switch between "Song Edit Tracks Displayed =SEQ "and" Song Edit Tracks Displayed = switch SONG ":

• Are you in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, you can use aDouble-click on any track button between Sequence and SongTracks back and forth. You see Sequence tracks when the LEDson the track buttons flash, and song tracks when it evenly. lights

9-18

Page 177


9-19

Blending sequence and song tracks in Song ModeIf you have created and edited a song, you have theRounding off the whole song yet your "mix". This can beChange volume and panning for each track independently andrecord. The data is not affected in the tracks; itis dedicated to a mixdown track created (actually part of aSong tracks is) on which the volume and pan data storedbe. The whole thing always happens over the length of the entire song.You can show or hide any traces in this way andProgramming interesting pan change.

To accommodate the volume and pan for Sequence tracks:• Select a song that contains the tracks you want to mix them.• Go to the Control - by the Bank Control - Press

( Bank 1 ) and the Record Mode ( Screen 1 ) "Record = MIXDOWN"ask.

• Set the Song Edit Tracks Displayed parameter to "Song EditTracks Displayed = SEQ "

• Press one of the track - to select the track buttons, theTo be "mixed". If you have z. B. selected track 3,are the volume and pan of Track 3 each sequence of songsrecorded.

• Select the Edit Track mode by pressing the Edit Track button. Press Screen 0 contains the volume parameters (volume) for thisTrack. (Or panorama when you want to record.)

• Press Record / Play . The KS-32 goes in the overdub mode.• Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can

Now the volume (or pan) change parameters. EverythingYou make is recorded.

• At the end of the song, or if you stop • Continue button appearsKeep NEW / OLD screen. Here you can listen to the results,before you decide what you want to keep.

• To mix a different track, press the track button andrepeat the procedure.

To accommodate the volume and pan of a song tracks:• Select the song.• Go to the Control by the -Bank, Control push button

( Bank 1 ) and the Record Mode ( Screen 1 ) "Record = MIXDOWN"ask.

• Set the Song Edit Tracks Displayed parameter to "Song EditTracks Displayed = SONG "(Note also that through doublethe track buttons also switch between sequence and song tracks andforth can. The corresponding LEDs flash when SongTracks are selected. In addition, song tracks are always with # 9 -Represented 16 while the Sequence tracks the # 1 - 8 are).

• Press one of the track buttons to select the track, theTo be "mixed". If you have z. B. selected track 3,Volume and Pan Song Track 3 (shown as track11) recorded.

Page 178


• Select the Edit Track mode on by pressing the Edit Track button. Press Screen 0 contains the volume parameters (volume) for thisTrack. (Or panorama when you want to record.)

• Press Record / Play . The KS-32 goes in the overdub mode.• Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can

9-20

Now the volume (or pan) change parameters. EverythingYou make is recorded.

• At the end of the song, or if you stop • Continue button appearsKeep NEW / OLD screen. Here you can listen to the results,before you decide what you want to keep.

• To mix a different track, press the track button andrepeat the procedure.

Notes to the mixdown modeMixdown data for volume and pan in the song tracks ina special "ADD" Date Mode. The data are theother data added to the song tracks. This means:

• Mixdown data are always listed in the corresponding song trackstaken, whether you mix a sequence or song track.

• If you delete recorded volume and pan data andwant resampling, you must first with the filter function in theDelete event bank the old data (see section 10 ). Otherwise it would create newData was added, which overlap with the old (andCause problems) would.

• If you delete the song track, all mixdown datadeleted. Notes, controller or program changes have no effectat mixdown data, but deleting the track (via the "Erase" commandin the track Commands- Bank) also clears the mixdown information.

If possible, you should mixdown function as the last step in theUse production chain. So only when all recordings andLength changes are complete.

Note: There is another possibility, dynamic volume changesrecorded. You can use the optional foot pedal CVP-1 volumeRecord data. To do this under System • MIDI / Screen 3 "Pedal =Volume # 7 "and make the changes in ADD mode on.This volume changes are recorded as MIDI controller # 7names which are stored independently of the mixdown data.

Page 179

KS-32 user guide Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Part 10 - Sequencer ProgrammingThe locate Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10 - 2

Sequence Locate ............................................... ............................ 10 - 2Song Locate ............................................... ................................... 10-3Seq-Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch function ............. 10-4Editing the times in the Song mode ........................................... ..10 - 5Adjustment of the positions in real-time .......................................... 10-5Seq-Punch-Out ............................................. ................................. 10-6Auto Punch ............................................... .................................... 10-6Tap Tempo ............................................... .................................... 10-6Tempo - song tempo offset ........................................... .......... 10-6

The Control Bank .............................................. ..................................... 10-7Loop ................................................. ............................................. 10-7Step Entry ............................................... ...................................... 10-7Record - The record mode ............................................ .......... 10-10Auto Punch ............................................... .................................. 10-10Song uses Effect from .............................................. ................... 10-10Song Edit Tracks Displayed ........................................... ........... 10 - 11Save Changes mode ............................................. ...................... 10-12About the "Save Changes?" - Screen ........................................ .... 10-12Total Sequencer Free memory (display only) ........................... 10 - 13Reinitialize sequencer ............................................... ................. 10-14

The Click Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10-14Click ................................................. ........................................... 10-14Click-volume ............................................... .............................. 10-14

10-1

Tempo ................................................. ........................................ 10-15The Song Bank - Song Edit functions ........................................ ... 10-16

Create-song ............................................... ................................. 10-16Copy song ............................................... ................................... 10-17Erase Song / Preset ............................................. .......................... 10-17Song information ............................................... ......................... 10 - 18Rename Song / Preset ............................................. ...................... 10 - 18Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10 - 19Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step Editor ............. 10 - 20Editing Song steps - The Song Step Editor .......... 10-22

The Seq Commands Bank ............................................ ........................ 10-24Create-Sequence / Preset ............................................. ................. 10-24Copy Sequence ............................................... ............................ 10-25Erase Sequence / Preset ............................................. ................... 10-26Sequence information ............................................... .................. 10-26Rename Sequence / Preset ............................................. ............... 10-27Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10-27Append Sequence ............................................... ........................ 10-28Change Length - inserting and deleting bars ............ 10-29

The track Commands Bank ............................................ ..................... 10-31Determination of the editing area - Track-range function .... 10-31Event Edit Track ............................................. ........................... 10 - 32Copy Track ............................................... .................................. 10-36Erase Track ............................................... .................................. 10-37Merge Track ............................................... ................................ 10-37Transpose Track ............................................... .......................... 10-38Shift Track ............................................... ................................... 10-39Scale Track ............................................... .................................. 10-40Filter Events ............................................... ................................ 10-41

Quantize-Track.....................................................................................10 - 42Track Mute status ............................................. ................................... 10-43

Page 180

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming KS-32 user guide

From the Seq / Preset Edit mode can be reached via the Bank - buttons ( Bank 0 - 7.)the different sequence edit functions.

SongCmds

LFO

SeqCmds

Filter

TrackCmds

Env 2

QuantizeTrack

Amp

MuteTracks

Output

Locate

Wave

Control

Pitch

Click

Env 1

The locate bankThe locate database contains not only valuable sequencer - information,but also the pace - setting and the GOTO (Car Locator)Function.

00 Sequence / Song LocateLocate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen 0th

First we see the screen to locate as remains after dialing aSequence appears. If you select a song on that screen looks slightly different(see below).

Sequence Locate

SEQ 00 STOP

Bar = 001 Beat = 04

Sequence space Sequence Status

In the upper left corner you can see the number of the current sequence.

The sequencer status (Play, Stop or Record) is always in the rightupper corner displayed.

Bar / Beat - The sequencer Goto functionUsing the Goto function you can quickly reach any point in

10 - 2

Jump to a sequence to record from there or just to playcan.

• Press the Enter • Save - button. Then the display shows:

Press ENTER, goto

Bar = 001 Beat = 01

Page 181


10-3

• The measure number (Bar) flashes. With the Data Entry knob or theUp • Yes / No • Down cursor keys can now download the desired positionbe set. Use the left / right cursor can be betweenMeasure number and beat (beat) switch back and forth.

• Press the Enter • Save - key after entering the key. In theDisplay the main screen again. This Goto functionyou can quickly and easily repeatedly in a certain placethe sequence jump - the position remains in effect until ais selected other sequence (or a new position is set).If the position is adjusted, sufficient pressing theEnter • Save button (on the Locate screen) to at this pointjump.

• Did you use the Goto function to a certain pointcome, you start the sequencer using the Stop button to get out of thereto play. (The Stop button also functions as a Continue button. With startthe sequence always starts from the beginning.)

• If you want to record from that point, press and hold the Record -Button, press to stop • Continue .

Song LocateIf you have selected a song, the locate screen looks like this:

SONG00 SNGS

S01 R01 B001 b01

Song space Song Status

Step # repetition time # Shock #

Note that the sequencer status in the upper right corner nowSNGS indicating that the song's stop and indicates that a track is selectedis.

• Press the Enter • Save button. Then the display shows:

Press ENTER, goto

S01 R01 B001 b01

• As with the sequence Goto function also flashes the first parameter(Here the step number). Again, you can use data entry control andthe Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to set the new position,while with the left / right cursor keys to change the parametercan be.


Than 10 - 4

Song Locate parameters are:• STEP - shows the current song position in steps.• REPETITION - Displays the number of repetitions of a step.• BAR - Shows the number of cycles in the relevant Song - Step.• BEAT - Displays the position in shock.

• Press the Enter • Save button ends the entering. In theDisplay the main screen again. This Goto functionyou can quickly and easily repeatedly in a certain placethe sequence jump - the position remains in effect until ais selected other sequence (or a new position is set).If the position is adjusted, sufficient pressing theEnter • Save button (on the Locate screen) to at this pointjump.

• Did you use the Goto function to a certain pointcome, you start the sequencer using the Stop button to get out of thereto play. (The Stop button also functions as a Continue button. With startthe sequence always starts from the beginning.)

• If you want to record from that point, press and hold the Record -Button, press to stop • Continue .

01 Sequence / Song Punch InLocate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 1

Seq Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch functionIf you have selected a sequence, you will see the display clock,Beat, and clock pulse in which the sequencer is switched on carPunch-in recording starts. This item belongs to theSeq / Song punch-out function together.

If the auto punch feature turned on, the KS-32 withinSupplied boundaries. Would you like to z. B. only the third beat of arecord four-bar sequence:• Select the Auto Punch function and set auto punch = ON.

(See " Control Bank "further back in this part.)• Select the punch-in time and make you punch in B003.b01.c01 =

(Cycle 3, 1st quarter, clock pulse 1).• Select the punch-out time and make Punch-Out = B003.b04.

c96 (cycle 3, 4th quarter, clock pulse 96)• Press Record / Play and just been playing with time. The KS

32 automatically starts the 3rd time with the recording and increases thelast clock pulse of the 3rd cycle itself off again.

Seq Punch In

B001 b01 C01

Clock Shock Clock

Page 183


• Entering the times are changed using the data entry control or the• Yes Up / Down • No cursor . Use the left / right cursor switchbetween clock, district and Clock.

• Press Enter • Save once to turn the auto punch parameters on theset current values. (Double-click to enter • Save sets carPunch in cycle 1, 1st quarter, clock 1)

When a sequence is created, these times will automaticallyDefault values are set (beginning and end of a sequence / a song).If these values are changed, they remain active until new valuesbe set, or a new sequence / a new song is selected.

10-5

Editing the times in Song ModeYou can use the auto punch mode and the Edit Times screen forUse song tracks. If a song is selected, the screen appears asfollows:

ShockClockRepeatStep

Song Punch In:

S01R01B001b01C01

Clock

Note that now you have included two new parameters for the periodare: The Song step number and the number of repetition. In Order Toat any desired point can be selected exactly in a song.

Adjustment of the positions in real-timeIf you know the points for punch-in and punch-out exactly canYou enter these values manually. If not, you can also quasi"In passing" mark. Here's how:• Select the punch-in screen on.• Press Play . sequence or song is playing.• If the site is where you want to stand types later, press

Enter • Save . In order for the punch-in time is accepted.• At the point where the recording is to end, press again

Enter • Save . This time is used as the punch-out.• Now you can go on shooting, provided is Auto Punch

activated and the KS-32 rises and off automatically.

Page 184


02 Sequence / Song Punch OutLocate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 2

Seq Punch-OutDo you have a sequence is selected, the display shows clock, districtand the clock interval at which the KS-32 gets out of the receptacle,Auto Punch is active. The parameter belongs together with "Seq punch-in"the auto punch feature. Read the punch-in parameters -Description above.

03 Auto Punch / TempoLocate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Auto PunchThis is the same parameter that can be found in the Control Bank - heis again in this bank, so it together with theCan achieve times without having to change banks.(Detailed description in " Control Bank ").• ON - the KS-32 enters at the marked locations on and off.• OFF - normal recording without time requirements.

Auto Punch = ON

Tempo = 120

PaceDetermines the speed of the current sequence. Can the Data EntryController can be set; or you set the pace by

10-6

rhythmically Enter • Save button press when you click on this screenare.

Do you have in the bank control set "MIDI Clock =" appears here"Tempo =" EXT. An external MIDI signal then controls the tempo.

Range: 25 to 250 BPM (beats per minute), or EXT.

Tap TempoIn both tempo benches (Locate and click), can use the Enter • Save -Press the pace can be specified. The Enter • Save button can alwaysbe used as a "tap tempo" button when a speed parameter inScreen will appear.

Tempo - Tempo Song offsetHere the pace is determined for a song. The number corresponds to aPercent value of the sequence tempo - Change the tempo offset,The tempo changes each sequence of this song by +/- 99%, withinthe limits of 25-250 BPM. Here's "Tempo = + 00", allSequences played in their original tempo.

Page 185


Represents the control bank "Clock = MIDI," here is "Tempo =" EXT. Anexternal MIDI signal then controls the tempo.

Range: -99 to +99%, or EXT

The Control BankIn the Control Bank are the parameters for the basic settingsthe sequencer.

10 Loop / CountoffControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

LoopThis parameter determines whether a sequence or a song in circlesis played, or is stopped after a single passage. ThisSetting is stored for each sequence / each song.• ON - The sequence or song is always repeated.• OFF - no repeat -after unique playing stops

Sequencer.

Loop = ON

Countoff = RECORD

CountoffDetermines whether the recording and / or playing with a eintak-to begin tigenVorzähler.• OFF - No count-in. The sequencer starts running immediately ( Play and Record ).• ON - one bar count is played before the start.• RECORD - count-only before recording. This is the default

Setting.• QUIET - "silent" count-in before play and record.

11 Step Entry / RecordControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 1

Step EntryUse this parameter to turn the KS-32 Step Into command to.With step-Entry You can aufzeichen notes and controller by themuse at certain points in the sequence, rather than the original tempoeinzuspielen. This method can be useful when heavy, fastPassages are to be imported, or in the middle of program changesmust be used.

10-7

Page 186


10-8

For single step input:

• Adjust Step-entry to ON.• Press Record and Play . The display shows:

Step Recording!

Autostep = OFF

The Auto Step parameter determines whether after each -Tastendruck thenext step is to be selected.

• OFF - The sequencer does not go to the next step before Enter • Saveis pressed. Thus, multiple notes can be entered on a stepbe.

• ON - The sequencer automatically goes one step further, ifa key is pressed. Thus lasssen easy runs and arpeggiosenter. For no chords can be so entered.

Did you here the desired setting is made, press theRight cursor . The display is now:

Gate = STEP

B001 b01 c01

Clock ClockShock } Current Positionin the sequence

Here, the length of notes during single-step input is set.• MANUAL - Note length is determined by releasing the button.

Press and hold a button and go to this step by stepon. Release the button when the desired impact going on, and the notehas the appropriate length.

• STEP - The length is determined by the Step parameter to the nextScreen determined. Each key then has the same length.

• FIXED - FIXED is similar to STEP. All notes have the sameLength. In contrast to the STEP length is not the Step-Parameter dependent. You will separately by an extra parameterdetermined that will appear in the display:

Gate = FIXED £

B001 b01 C01Fixed Gate

Time

Current position in the sequence

Page 187


• This extra parameter can be selected and changed.

Range: half notes to 1/64 triplets.

10-9

Now press the right cursor again, and the Step parameterappears on the display:

Step = £

B000 b01 C00

Current position in the sequence

Step Size

This is the last screen about Step Recording. He shouldbe seen when entering notes.

The Step parameter determines the amount by which the sequencer furthermigrated when you select the next step. This will in time valuesshown.

Range: half notes to 1/64 Triplets

If all parameters are set, you can start typing. TheRecording will continue until the sequence is finished, orStop • Continue button is pressed. The display is then "Press ENTERto keep track NEW "(or" Press ENTER to keep first XXX bars "whenit was the first recording).

Tip: Keep in the Step Record Record button is pressed, be playedSounds not included. This is useful when, for example,Drum Tracks receives, and first must find the correct key.

Page 188


Record - The record modeThe second parameter to this screen, selects one of three RecordModes of.• REPLACE - Everything is recorded on an existing track,

deletes the previous data. The sequencer beeendet recording,if the sequence once has expired and changes in theAudition / Play mode. This is the default setting.

• ADD - New data is added to the old (or mixed).Existing data is retained. Again, the sequencer stops at theEnd and go into the audition / Play mode.

• LOOPED - As with ADD the new data be mixed.However, the sequencer is now on admission and repeated theUntil you press Stop sequence over and over again. This could be called "DrumMachine Mode "call - new notes are always asso-added.

There is also a fourth record mode, which is only reachable when aSong is selected:• MIXDOWN - Here are dynamic volume and pan

Changes for sequence and song tracks recorded. The KS-32accepts only on Ändernungen of the volume and panning screens.

10-10

Notes, controllers, program changes, etc. in this fashion notwas added.

Depending on the setting of the "Song Edit Tracks Displayed" parameter (seeScreen number 14 below), you can either sequence or songTracks mix.

12 Auto Punch / ClockControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 2

Auto PunchThis parameter enables a very powerful feature of KS-32 -the auto punch feature. Auto punch means that at a overdubReceiving the KS-32 automatically defined at points you in theShot on and drop out again. You can, for running sequencerto play and the KS-32 enters the intake and like ainvisible sound engineer. The points of entry and exit, we callEdit times, they are on the screens 02 and 03 in the Locate Bankset.• ON - The KS-32 used in the Locate Bank established Edit

Times for punch-in and punch-out.• OFF - Normal recording without considering the Edit times. The

is the default setting.

Page 189


Clock - The sequencer synchronization sourceThis parameter determines the synchronization source for the sequencer:• INTERNAL - The internal clock controls the speed of

Sequencer. The KS-32 has a resolution of 96 ppq (pulses perQuarter note) for extremely accurate recording. This is the default setting.

• MIDI - Selects the external MIDI clock as sync source forthe sequencer. Use this setting when another oneDevice (eg. As a computer sequencer or a rhythm machine) asWant to use master clock. As soon as "MIDI Clock =" angewältis displayed at the appropriate place "Tempo = EXT" as an indicator thatthe KS-32 is synchronized externally.

13Control BankSong uses effect from:

Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 3

Song uses Effect from:Here you can set which utilizes effect when playing a songto be - that of the individual sequences or a parent SongEffect. A song always consists of a chain of sequences ofWill be played back. Each sequence has its own effect. WhenChange from one sequence to the next, it can be too shortInterruptions occur when a new effect must be loaded.This can be avoided by the song a separate,parent effect is.• Sequences - The particular sequence effects are used.• Song - The song sets the sequence effect effects expire. This is

the factory setting.

14 Song Edit Tracks DisplayedControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 4

Song Edit Tracks DisplayedHere you determine if the song or Sequence in MIXDOWN FashionTracks to be mixed.• SEQ - the display shows the sequence of tracks appear just overall

selected songs. The LEDs above the track buttons will flash for youknow that you can now see Sequence tracks on the display and not the song

10 - 11

Tracks.• SONG - in the display you see song tracks. This is the default

Setting.

Tip : If you are working on a song, and is not persistent in the Control Bankwant to go to switch the tracks, you can use the following trickapply:• If you are in Sequence mode, you can use a quick double

switch to song tracks on a track button. So, as you would in theControl Bank this parameter changed. The LED on the track buttonsflashes when you see Sequence tracks. You uniformly illuminated whenYou have selected song tracks. Song tracks as tracks # 9 - 16shown.

Page 190


10-12

15 Save Changes fashionControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 5

SaveChanges FashionWith this parameter, you can choose between three different modesSelect how the KS-32 changes to the track parametersaccepts or not.• EDITS AUTO SAVED - All changes in track parameters or

the sound track selection is saved immediately. You do not needwith Enter • Save to save. The "Save Changes" query appearsnot.

• U-SAVE MANUALLY - you can use any track parameter orEdit track sounds, but the changes are automaticallydiscarded if another sequence or song is called. The"Save Changes" Abrfrage not appear. You must manuallyEnter • Save button press to accept change. This isa practical setting when not busy with shootingand are the "Save Changes" query looks rather disturbing. When youHowever, a new recording, the KS-32 automatically entersthe SHOW PROMPT setting.

• SHOW PROMPT - If you have a track parameter or the soundhave changed a track and then a new sequence orSelect another song, you will be using the "Save Changes" queryasked whether you want to accept or discard the changes,as described below. This is the default.

About the "Save Changes?" - ScreenTogether with notes, controllers and program changes, available on eachAre recorded track, other data are still in a sequence ora song stored. These are:

• the name of the sequence or song• the pace of the sequence or song• the sound of each track• all performance / track parameters for each track• which tracks are selected and / or layered together• setting the LOOP parameter in the Control Bank• Has CLICK parameter in the Click -Bank• punch-in and punch-out points


10 - 13

Every time you record a track of a sequence or a song,All these parameters are saved automatically - that is, theKS-32 remembers them when they leave the sequence (by aSelect another) and attacks later back to it. If you nowchange those parameters and select a different sequence appearsfollowing message:

Save Changes?

SEQUENCE NAME

• Press the Up • Yes cursor key, the sequence or songsaved with the new parameters.

• Press the Down • No cursor key parameters remain asthey were after the last shot.

In both cases, the track data (notes, controller and pro-Program Change) always saved. Sometimes it is difficult toRemember, what you now exactly changes when this screen appears. ThanGood rule to remember: Do you agree with the sequence or songsatisfied, press YES quiet. Did you just herumexperi-mented with different tempos, sounds, MIDI settings, etc., andwant to leave everything as it was, press NO.

Tip : Are you in the select sequences / presets mode, there is a simple tricksave all changes in a sequence or a song. WithDouble-click on the Enter • Save button.

As mentioned above, you can work around this issue by theSaveChanges parameter to U-SAVE MANUALLY turn. For liveApplication and other applications where with tempo, track parameters, inter alia,experimenting, that's the right attitude.

16 Total Sequencer Free MemoryControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 6

Total Sequencer Free Memory (display only)This parameter shows the remaining space in the sequencer inPercent. Here you can enter or change anything.

Range: 00% to 100%

Page 192


17 Reinit SequencerControl Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 7

Reinitialize SequencerAllows you to delete the entire sequencer memory contents. IfYou want this, select this parameter and:• Press Enter • Save . The KS-32 is surprised and asks "Erase

Sequencer Memory? ".• Press Up • Yes cursor or Enter • Save . The KS-32 clears all

Presets, sequences and songs from memory. Afterwards only a

10-14

Empty sequence and a blank song in the squares 00 and 70. (It isalways a song and a sequence in memory.)

The Click BankThe Click -Bank contains the parameters associated with the metronome signal andhave to do the tempo of a sequence or a song.

20Click / IntervalClickBank Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen 0th

ClickDetermines whether the metronome is heard or not.• OFF - the click signal is not when playing even when

To hear recording.• ON - the click signal is always heard when the sequencer is running.• RECORD -the click signal will be heard when recording. that is

the default setting.

Click = RECORD

Interval = ™

IntervalDetermines the note value of the click signal.

Range: 1/2 to 1 / 32T notes (1/4 notes is the default setting)

21Click Volume / Pan ClickClickBank Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 1

Click-VolumeAdjusts the volume of the metronome.Range: 00 to 99 (99 is default)

Page 193


Click-PanDetermines the position of the click in the stereo image.• LEFT - The click signal is left in the stereo image• CENTER - The click signal is in the middle. This is the

Default.• RIGHT - The click signal is quite right in the stereo image.

22 PaceClickBank Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 2

PaceSpecifies the tempo of the sequence. If the sequencer is running and thisScreen is displayed, you can use the Enter • Save button, theSpeed typing ("TapTempo"). If "MIDI Clock = 'is here"Tempo =" EXT.

Range: 25 to 250 BPM (beats per minute) or EXT

Important : After you have selected the pace, make sure that youthis parameter then leave again. Since this parameter avery wide range of values is (226 individual items, distributed over aControl range of about 6 cm, see chart below), the controller responds verysensitive. A small glitch or a slight vibration(Such as a hard-hinged key) to the data controller to aother value "jump" and thereby leave the value for the speedchange.

10-15

Tempo Control Range:

WINDOW

254-255253-254252-253251-252

005-006004-005003-004002-003001-002000-001

VALUE INDISPLAY

250249248247

302928272625

As shown in the diagram above, there are 226 differentParameter values. As the pace of parameters such a large range of valueshas, which is data entry knob so sensitive that even a slightContact is sufficient in the window (or range) of anotherTo slip out.

Page 194


The Song Bank - Song Edit FunctionsIf you are in the Seq / preset edit mode, the song Cmds button ( Bank 3 )press, you can reach the song Cmds bank. Were you previously aSequence is selected, the message "SORRY appears in the display! Select afirst song, "which states that you must have selected a song to income to this bank.

30 Create SongSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen 0th

Create SongUse this command to create a new song that thenSong step editor can be assembled.If you select this parameter, the following display appears:

SONG ## SNGS

Create SONG / Pset

• Press Enter • Save . The display will then:

New Song

Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you cannow scroll through the free song memories.• Do you have a location is found, press the right cursor . In the

Display shows:

New Name =

Song - ##

Now you can get back to data entry knob and cursor keys to select aEnter the name. With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor select theCharacters, with the left / right cursor into place.

• Have you found a place and enter a name, pressYou will enter • Save . The display will briefly "Command Successful!"

10-16

Note : As I said, you can use the song Cmds only reach -Bank ifa song is selected. The quickest way to a new songTo create is to call an empty memory location and enter • Save -Push button, as described under "How to make a new sequence / song creates" -Part 9 described.

Page 195


10-17

31 Copy SongSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 1

Copy songWith this command, you can access a copy of the currently playing songanother location make. The original song remainsunchanged. First, make sure that the songYou want to copy is also selected. Then select the Copy SongParameters. The display shows "Copy Song".

• Press Enter • Save . The display is now:

From Song =

CURRENT SONG

• Press the right cursor . Then you will see:

To Song

Location = ##

The data entry knob , you can now have a free spacesearch. Have you found a place, press the right cursoragain.

New name =

MY FIRST HIT

Now you can enter a 16-digit name. Data Entry knob and• Yes Up / Down • No-cursor to determine the character, left / right cursorthe location.

• If you have entered a name, press Enter • Save to theComplete entry. The display briefly shows "command appearsSuccessful! "To confirm.

32Erase Song / PsetSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 2

Erase Song / PresetThe Erase Song command deletes any song / preset storageand leaves an undefined memory location. First, select theErase Song command. Then press the Enter • Save button.

Page 196


10 - 18

The display shows:

Erase SONG ##

<SONG NAME>

Song space

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you canoccupied Seicherplätze scroll. In the upper right corner of the displayis the memory number below the name of the song.

• If the song you want to delete in the display, press theEnter • Save button. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears asConfirmation.

33 Song InformationSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 3

Song InformationAppear after selecting the "Song Information" command keyInformation about the current song on the display such. As the number ofSong steps, the size in events and the total playing time. To thisDisplay information:

• Select the song and then the song information command.• Press Enter • Save . The display is now the song name and

Space.• Press the right cursor . The display two parameters appear:

"Song Steps" - The Number Song steps."Song-size" - The size of the current song in Events.

• Press the right cursor again. The displays shows theTotal playing time of the songs in minutes, seconds and hundredthsSeconds.

34 Rename Song / PsetSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 4

Rename Song / PresetWith this command you can change the name of a song. The displayis:

SONG ## SNGS

Rename SONG / Pset

Page 197


• Press Enter • Save . Now the display looks like this:

New name =

<Old song name>

• Use the data entry knob and cursor keys to scroll the newEnter the name. Then press Enter • Save and the displayappears as confirmation shortly "Command Successful!".

35 Copy Preset DataSong Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 5

Copy Preset DataAs you know from the previous chapters, are presetsComponents of each sequence, the important information about the

10 - 19

"Performance" aspects of a track included. Sounds -Tastenumfang,MIDI and Other Information contained in a preset. (SeePart 8 - Presets for more information on presets).

This command can now be preset data in a song on adelegated to others. This refers to the preset data of the song tracks ,regardless of the preset information of the tracks in eachSequences that make up the song. Note that Song PresetOnly in a different data defined can be copied song / preset. ToCopy an undefined song you use the Copy Preset -Function under the Make Default Preset button.

Select a song and call this command appears inDisplay:

SONG ## SNGS

Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . The display is then "From Preset Song ##"that it comes as a confirmation for the preset data of this song.

• Press the right cursor . The display will then:

To Preset =

Song - ##

You can now use data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursorCalling an existing preset location. Because there is no noteData are concerned, any space can here in the sequencerbe taken, even if he is not in one of the song benches.

Page 198


• If a new location is found, press Enter • Save to the commandcomplete. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears asConfirmation.

36 Edit Song StepsSong Commands BankPress Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 6

Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step EditorSelect the Edit Song Steps command to the Song Step Editorreach. Here sequences are successively set to the basicTo form the skeleton of a song.

A song consists of several steps (steps). Each step has:• a sequence which is played at this point,• a number of repetitions, or reps of this sequence, and• Mute and Transpose information for each track of the sequence in

this step.

When you select Edit Song Steps The following display appears:

Song ## SNGS

Edit Song Steps

Song space

• Press Enter • Save . You will now see the main screen of the SongStep Editor. Here you can access the step, which sequence itis assigned, and how often they should be repeated.

The display looks like this:

Number of repetitions Current Step #

10 - 20

Number of repetitions

Intro Sequence

Rep ## Step ##

Sequence name

Current Step #

The default parameters on this screen is the step number. Ifthis screen is first selected, this parameter flashes, andcan immediately be changed. This gives you faster accesson the two main parameters of this screen, step number andRepeat. Use the left / right cursor to jump back and forth between the twoand forth. To select the repeat parameter, press theCursor left to get on the Step parameter also.

Page 199


• Step - If this parameter is selected, the step number can be changedbe. With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursorYou can scroll through each song steps.

Range: 01 to 99

• Sequence Name - This is the sequence for the corresponding songStep selected. An empty Step "UNDEFINED STEP" appears.To add a new step at the end of the song, select"* END OF SONG *" and push once the Up • Yes cursor buttonto define the step. Characterized a sequence is used, andthe end of the song for a position shifted to the rear.

• Rep - This is the number of iterations for the sequence ofSteps entered.

Range: 01 to 99 or FS

FS stands for Foot Switch. If = FS is set in REP, thecurrent song step repeated until the Aux. Foot switch (onlyif the optional foot switch SW-5 / SW1-10 connected) pressedwill. When the foot switch is pressed, the current step is stillplayed to the end and it follows the next song step.

If you have set these parameters, you go with the right cursorone place behind the Sequence Name parameter. The displayThe following display appears:

Transpose = +12

Status = PPPMMTTT

On this screen, you can now determine which played tracks orbe muted (mute) and which are to be transposed. TheWhole applies again only for the currently active song step. In addition,If a value for the transpose be set.• Transpose - Specifies the value for the transpose that for each

Track is considered to be transposed played in this step (seebelow). This makes the mood for the whole track is increased ordecreased.

Range: -12 to +12, with each step corresponding to one semitone.

• MUTE AND TRANSPOSE - The LawCursor can go through the individual tracks, and individualdetermine whether a track is turned on or off and transposedto. An M means the track is muted. A P is, the trackis played normally, and T means the track is transposed andplayed.

10-21

Page 200


10-22

• When all tracks are set correctly, you can take the legalCursor to the following screen:

INSERT Step ##

Middle 8 Groove

INSERT / REMOVE Step ##

Sequence name

The last screen parameters in the Song step editor gives you thePossibility to add or remove steps (insert and remove).

• INSERT - before the current song step a blank step is inserted.• REMOVE - the current song step is deleted and the resulting

Closed gap again.

Editing Song steps - The Song Step EditorTo edit the song steps of the current song:

• Select Edit Song Steps by pressing the song Cmds button ( Bank3 ), and Screen 6 if you are fashion in the Sequence Edit.

• Move the right cursor in the Name field. In a newSong is available as Step 1 is always "* END OF SONG *".

• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor of the step is defined and aSequence selected.

• Double-tap the left cursor to the parameter for theTo achieve repetition. Enter the number of times a(REPS = ##). If the sequence only once run, must have a 01 stop here.

• Repeatedly press the right cursor to the Transpose / StatusParameters appear. Want to individual tracks in this Stepmute or transpose, make the lettersaccordingly. To mute a M .To transpose tracks, make T a. You must alsothen set a value for the transposition of these tracks.

• Repeatedly press the left cursor until the Step parameter againappear in the display (it comes to where they were just as often theMust press button).

• If all entries are correct, go back to "Step = ##" andgo with the Up • Yes-cursor to the next step of the song. (The displayis again "* END OF SONG *"). Make everything here aspreviously described. For each successive song step selectimmmer first displays a sequence, enter the number ofRepetitions, and then go on to the next.

• There is always a last step, "* END OF SONG *" behind thedefined last song step.

Page 201


In order to arrive at a different step in the song:• Select "Step =", and use the Up • Yes / No- • Down cursor

to arrive at any step in the song. Have allCompleted entries, you can scroll back through all the steps toto check that everything is correct.

In order to change something in a song step:• If you want to change one of the variables in a step (z. B.

10-23

Sequence name, repetitions, mute or Transpose), selectsimply step on, go to the parameter and change it.

By one step insert (insert):• Go to "Step = ##" and select the Step to, before the new

Should lie Step. If z. B. between Step 2 and Step 3, a newis to be used, go to the third

• Use the cursor left to go to INSERT / DELETE parameter.Select "INSERT" and press Enter • Save . An empty step isinserted (the display will then EMPTY * LOCATION *).

• To enter in the Name field and use the Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor in a new sequence for the new step.

• Make all the Step parameter for this new step (seeabove).

To the song to a step somewhere delete (delete):• Go to "Step = ##" and select the Step that will be deleted

to.• Use the left cursor go to INSERT / DELETE parameter.

Select "DELETE" and then press Enter • Save . Thecorresponding song step is deleted and slide all the following stepsa place before.

When you are completely finished, press the Select Seq / preset to the areato leave. You can then play button when you are their newWant to listen to the song.

Page 202


The Seq Commands BankIf you are in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode Seq Cmds press button( Bank 4 ) They come in the Seq Cmds -Bank. Press this button to turn offa song out, "SORRY appear! Select a sequence first "to youto remember that you only need to select a sequence to in thisTo get bank.

40Seq Commands BankCreate SEQ / Pset

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen 0th

Create Sequence / PresetThis command creates a new sequence is created.

If you have selected these parameters, the following message appears:

SEQ 49 STOP

Create SEQ / Pset

• Press Enter • Save . The display will then:

New Sequence

Location = ##

10-24

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can nowby the free sequence still available - Scroll memory.

• Have you found a place for your sequence, press the laws, regulationsCursor . The following display appears:

Note value

Time Signature

4.4

Beats per measure

With the two parameters on this screen, the time signature for the new oneSequence set. First, set the beats per measure and goThen use the right cursor for the second value, the note valuethe blows. Also here are data entry controller and up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor data entry.

Page 203


• If you entered the beat, press the right cursor .The display shows:

New name =

Sequence - ##

You can now, as elsewhere in the sequencer also aEnter the name for the sequence.

• You now have a free space occupied by a sequence ofa time signature and given a name, and can now use a pressureto enter • Save button to complete the whole. The display will read againshort "Command Successful!"

41Seq Commands BankCopy Sequence

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 1

Copy SequenceWith this function, you can use a sequence to anotherCopy space. Note that while the original sequenceremains unchanged. First, make sure that the tocopied sequence is also selected. Then select the CopyParameters. The display shows "Copy Sequence."

• Press Enter • Save , then the display shows:

FROM Sequence

LATEST SEQUENCE

• By pressing the right cursor button appears followingDisplay:

To Sequence

Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can

10-25

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor canNow scroll through the still free sequencer memory. Do You Havethe target location is found, press again the right cursor :

New name =

Sequence ##

Page 204


10-26

You can enter a 16-digit name for the new sequence now.With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursordetermine the character to the left / right cursor into place.

• When you have found a name, press Enter • Save -Button. The display shows "Command Successful!". The copy iswith a new name at the desired location in memory.

42 Erase Seq / PsetSeq Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 2

Erase Sequence / PresetThe Erase Sequence / Preset command deletes an arbitrary sequence / presetSpace and leaves an undefined memory location. Choosefirst the Erase Sequence / Preset command. Then press theEnter • Save button. The display shows:

Erase SEQ ##

<SEQUENCE NAME>

Space

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you canthe occupied places scroll. In the upper right corner of theDisplay is the memory number below the name of the sequence.

• If the sequence that you want to delete in the display, press theEnter • Save button. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears asConfirmation.

43Sequence InfoSeq Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 3

Sequence InformationWith the "Sequence Information" command is available on request valuableInformation about the current sequence. These include the length inClocks, the space requirement in events and the total length ofcurrent sequence:

• Select the sequence in question, and then thisParameters.

• Press Enter • Save . Now the name and the display will showMemory number.

• Press the right cursor . The display will now appear twoParameters: "Length" - this is the length of the sequence in bars. "Size" -and how much space (in events), the sequence can claimtakes.

Page 205


10-27

• Press the right cursor button again. The display will nowthe meter of the current sequence.

• Press the right cursor again. The display now shows the totaltotal time of the sequence in minutes, seconds and hundredths of seconds.

44 Rename Seq / PsetSeq Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 4

Rename Sequence / PresetWith this command you can change the name of a sequence laterchange. If you select this command, the display looks like this:

SEQ ## STOP

Rename SEQ / Pset

• Press Enter • Save , the display looks like this:

New name =

<Age Seq name>

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can nowenter a new name. When you are finished, pressEnter • Save . The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears.

45Copy Preset DataSeq Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 5

Copy Preset DataAs has been said, SIDN Presets part of each sequence, includebut important information about the "performance" parameter of theSequence. Sound, -Tastenumfang, MIDI information and more stuff iscontained in a preset. (Presets in Part 8 - Presets exactlydiscussed shortly.)

This parameter is used to preset information of aTransfer sequence to a different location. Note thatthis command returns the saved preset data only to a definedPreset / Sequence / song memory transfers. To preset data to aundefined copy space, use the Copy Preset -Function under the Make Default Preset button. Select a sequenceand you invoke this command.

Page 206


The following display appears:

SEQ ## STOP

Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . Now appears "From Preset Seq in the display## "With the current sequence.Press the right cursor , then you will see:

To Preset =

Seq - ##

10-28

You can now use the data entry control and Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor each defined filter preset memory. Because not hereNote information is affected, you can use any space, eventake a song, not only sequences.

• Have you found a new place, you only need to enter • Savepress to complete the whole. Appears in the display likeseen "Command Successful!".

46 Append SequenceSeq Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 6

Append Sequence"Append" to attach a sequence to another, onenew sequence data with the sum of the two individual sequences is produced.Of course you can also hang a sequence of themselves in order todouble. The currently active sequence gets to another sequenceIS attached, which in turn remains unaltered. (ReadThat last sentence again prefer.)

• Make sure that the sequence that you want to extend, andis selected.

• Select the Append function. The display shows "Append isSequence. "

• Press Enter • Save . The display shows:

FROM Sequence =

<Sequence name>

• Now use the Find Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor the sequence of which is to be attached to the active sequence

Page 207


• Press the right cursor . appears in the display:

TO Sequence =

<Sequence name>

This is a display-only. Here, the sequence should be at the newSequence is to be attached.

• Press Enter • Save . For a moment Command appears "Successful! "Is displayed, as confirmation that all went well.

47 Change LengthSeq Command Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Command (Bank 4) / Screen. 7

Change Length - inserting and deleting bars in a sequenceAlthough the first recording of a sequence length of their first timessets, you can later delete this functional clocksor add.

From the Sequence Edit Bank select the Change Length parameter.The display shows "Change Length". Press Enter • Save , then seeYou:

INSERT ### bars

at 1 bar

On this screen you will find three parameters. Top left is whether clocksinserted (INSERT) or deleted (REMOVE) should be. Do You Haveentered this, you can use the right cursor to the next

10-29

Parameters are included. There the number of clocks is entered, the deletedor to be added. The third parameter indicates at whichSite in the sequence you want to happen.

INSERT clocksThe INSERT function, you can select any number up to aInsert total length of 999 bars. It consists of two steps:1) Determine to be inserted at which point bars, and2) How many bars are to be acquired.

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to determinewhere the new measures are intended to be. This can be any position in the sequencebe:

• If you select 01 clock, the clocks at the beginning of seconds arefrequency set.

Page 208


• If you have a clock behind to take the last beat of the sequence arethe new measures at the end of the sequence.

• If you are taking any other position, start the new measuresexactly at this point.

• Use the left / right cursor select the appropriate parametersto.

• Use the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursordetermine how many bars are to be added. Here you canYou enter each number up to a total length of the sequence of 999.This idle cycles are inserted starting at the location you previouslyhave entered.

CLEAR clocksWith the REMOVE function any bars of a sequence can be deleted, starting with any bar in the sequence.

This is useful if you are one in the first frameSequence have pressed the Stop button too late, and the length thenFor example, 5 instead of 4 bars is. Use this function to cutpractically from the end.

To bars of a sequence to be deleted:• Determine the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • No-

Cursor is to be deleted from where.• Then jump on the parameter that you want to delete the number of

Clock determined.• Enter here how many bars are to be deleted.• Press the Enter • Save button. The display briefly shows

"Command Successful!" As confirmation.

10-30

Page 209


10-31

The track Commands BankThe functions that can be found in the track Commands Bank concern,always the parameters of the selected tracks. When a sequencehas been selected, the selected track will always be edited; is aSong active, this applies to the corresponding song track.

Determination of the editing area - use the track-range functionFor most commands in the Event Edit Bank can be a certain loadingSet rich, are to be changed in the data. This can be very usefulhis Lich, if such. as only bass and snare drum in a drum trackshould be quantized, while the other sounds unquantized. stay This function is always used as follows.

• After the first access sees the track-range display like this:

Press ENTER to

DO ENTIRE TRACK

• "DO ENTIRE TRACK" flashes. It is not edited the whole track.• Press the Up • Yes cursor , "SET TRACK on the display

RANGE. "• Press Enter • Save . Then you will see:

SEQ Range Start

B001 b01 C01

• Now, determined using the cursor keys measure, beat, and clockwill be with the editing to begin.

Note: This display is valid only for the starting point in the sequence tracks. SongTracks have their own screen with additional parameters.

• If you have entered the starting point, press the right cursor .• Now it asks for the endpoint for editing. Enter here

the desired position, exactly as above. Here too, the SongTracks something other parameters.

Page 210


• If you have also entered the press again the right cursor .Now this screen appears:

Track Key Range

A0 C8

10 - 32

Low Key High Key

• This display is identical for sequence and song track. Here, theKeys extent be determined within the pass editingto. This goes beyond cursor and data entry control, but also with theKeyboard. (See Part 8 - Presets )

• If you have entered the keyboard range, press Enter • Save . In theDisplay is then "Press ENTER to DO RANGE ONLY."

• Press Enter • Save to confirm the entry.

Important : The Range Start and Range End times comply with the locatorsin the Locate Bank agree that you use for auto punch. If startbe changed and end somewhere that always applies to both areas.

50Track Commands BankEvent Edit track

Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen 0th

Event Edit trackThe Event Edit Track function is a powerful tool in theReworking of tracks. Every single note, each controller eventcan be localized individually and change.

The Event Edit Track function is on the same level asthe other track edit functions. Nevertheless, you need here beforedetermine which track you want to edit. If you onceEvent Editor, you can not change the track.

• Use the track buttons to the desired track.• Select the Event Edit Track function and press

Enter • Save . The display shows:

Track = 1

Event = ALL EVENTS

The top line shows the track number (display only) in thebottom line of the event type filter.

Page 211


Event - Event type filterHere you can specify which events are to be displayed when youscroll through the track. If this is ALL EVENTS, allrecorded events appear. Otherwise, you will see only the type ofwas chosen from the list below. This facilitates searchingcertain events, as all others are ignored in searches.The following event types are available:

MOD WHEEL - Modulation CHN PRESSR - Channel AftertouchPEDAL - foot pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volumeVOLUME - Volume Pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramicSUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheelSOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal PGM CHANGE - Program ChangeTimbral - Timbre controller KEY PRESSR - Polyphonic aftertouchRELEASE - Release Controller KEY EVENTS - Only notes EventsEXT CONTRL - External Controller ALL EVENTS - All note and controllerALL CONTRL - All controllers

• Press the right cursor . The display shows:

MOD WHL *** 123

Current Event Type Event valueEvent cursor

10-33

B001 b04 C96

Event location

This is the selection screen, the search - Display for almost all types of events.For ALL EVENTS, KEY PRESSURE and KEY EVENT sees thisScreen a bit different and will be discussed later.

Current Event TypeThis is the current event type, which can be seen in Dipslay. This is aview only parameter.

Event cursorIf you have selected this field, you can use data entry controllerand • Yes Up / Down • No cursor in the track jump back and forth, and afterSearch the events that are to be changed. Mitdem Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor you always jump to the next event in the series, with theData Entry knob to scroll quickly forward or backward. You will hearthe notes of the tracks.

Page 212


Event ValueHere you can see the value of the current event. The value can with theData Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to be changed.These changes will take effect immediately.

Event LocationDisplays the current postition in bars, district and clocks. These three pointscan be selected directly using the left / right cursor. Use the Up /Down cursor can then change the value and back in the track and manufacturedbe skipped. Legatees you that no influence of these parameters ontrack data has. It is intended solely for the overview and localization ofEvents in the track.

Note: When a song track is edited, this display has two moreParameters indicative of the song step and the number of repetitions.

Selection Screen for All Events, Key Events and Key PressureIf you are an Edit Events All Events, key events and key pressurehave been selected, an additional parameter will be displayed:

KEY EVNT G4 # 123

B001 b04 C96

Current Event Type Event value

Event location

Touch Name

Key NameThis additional parameter displays the name of the note, the edited, orthe aftertouch value (at key pressure) can be changed.

Applies to the note name the same as for the event cursor. Againyou can with Data Entry knob or Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor of aNote to the next jump.

To change a note, just play the desired new note

10-34

the keyboard.

Note: If the currently selected event is a KEY EVENT, the valuenext to the velocity (velocity). If this valuechange, you will notice that there are only every third orfourth value is displayed. This corresponds to the internal resolution of KS32 and is therefore completely normal.

Page 213


10 - 35

If the currently selected event a KEY EVENT, can be reached byPress the right cursor the note length (duration). It looks at theDisplay like this:

Event Duration

Beats 004 Clk 96

These two parameters determine the length of a particular note inBeats and clocks. This screen is only displayed if the current eventType KEY EVNT is. For all other types of events follows theLocation screen immediately Audition Screen (Before - After -Control).

Note: If you have selected ALL EVENTS alternately appear one orother screen, depending on which type is shown.

AUDITION, INSERT, and REMOVEIf you have found a specific point in the track, you canthe next screen notes, controller or Program Change onset(INSERT) or delete (REMOVE). You can also find old andCompare new version (Audition).• From the selection screen, press the right cursor until the display shows

is:

Press ENTER to

AUDITION / EXIT

Here you can do three things:1) INSERT : inserting notes, controller or Program Change2) REMOVE : Delete notes, controller or Program Change3) AUDITION : All changes (INSERT, REMOVE or other Editie-

ments) compare with the original version.• AUDITION / EXIT - If you have changed any events

(Either with the event location screen or the INSERT / REMOVECommands), come by pressing the Enter • Save button directly to theKEEP OLD / NEW screen. Have you looked at the events only, butnothing changes, exit by pressing the Enter • Save button, theTrack Cmds - Bank

• INSERT EVENT - With this command you can now events in theTrack inserting. What kind of event you determine through the eventFilter on the first screen of the Event Edit bank. Then go toSelection screen and locate the point at which used an eventshould be. Set the desired value. With Enter • Save isthe event used.

Page 214


10-36

• REMOVE EVENT - Removes the event that on the Selection Screenjust to see. As with INSERT first locate the event typeand then choose on the selection screen the exact event. ThanFinally, you use this screen to delete the event. Enter • Saveexecutes the command.

Tip : If a note is deleted, remain Touch name and velocitystored. When you next again inserting a note (INSERT)these values are taken as default value. So you can easilyMoving and comfortable single notes that are out of sync. This isbut only for note events.

51 Copy TrackTrack Commands BankPress Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 1

Copy TrackWith this command a track or a part thereof from the activeSequence copied to another track. This track is also in the sameSequence lie.

• Select "Copy Track" and press Enter • Save . The displayis:

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>

The top line shows the track number to be edited.You can change the cursor keys this parameter. In the bottomLine is the name of the sequence or the song that is being edited. ThisParameter is purely a display that can not be changed here.

• Press the right cursor , then you will see:

To: Track 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>

• If you want the output track in a different sequence orCopy to another song, type in the lower line the target sequenceor the desired song a. If the copy in the same sequence,just let stand the default setting.

• On the track parameter page, you can select the track now, in thein the data is to be copied.

Page 215



Insert copied

data at bar: 1

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can nowset the clock in which the data is to be inserted.

• Press again the right cursor . You may wish tore-enter a range for the data to be copied. (If theentire track can be copied, skip this screen easily.)

• If everything is correct, press Enter • Save .

10-37

52 Erase TrackTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 2

Erase TrackWith this command, notes, controllers, or other data be deleted;either from the entire track or a particular area.

• Select the Erase Track command and press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>


• Press the right cursor again and set the desiredEdit range (as described previously). If the entire track editingwill skip this screen easily.

• Once everything is set, press Enter • Save .

Note: If you deleted the whole track, there is no subsequentPossibility of comparison .

53 Merge TrackTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5 / Screen. 3

Merge TrackWith this command, the data of the current track will be aanother track mixed. The target track can in the same sequenceor are in another. The data remains the source tracksunaltered.

Page 216


• Select the Merge track parameters and press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>


• Press the right cursor. The display shows:

To: Track 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>

• If you want the data of the output - the tracks in a different sequence orCopy to another song, you can on the bottom line with Data-Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor to the correspondingSelect memory. The default is the current sequence, incontained the track.

• Go to the track parameters and to select the track with thethe data should be mixed. Press Enter • Save .

54 Transpose TrackTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 4

Transpose Track

10-38

The Transpose function increases or decreases the pitch of aparticular track in semitones. Moreover, with theTranspose the availability of drum and percussion tracksbe changed and adapted to other instruments by onlyindividual notes transposed.

• Select the Transpose function. Press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>


Page 217



Semi Tones to

Transpose: +00

• Enter the value to which the track is to be transposed:Range: -12 to +12 semitones. (If you have more than one octaveor want to transpose down, use this function simplyseveral times.)

• Press again the right cursor and set the desiredEdit range (as described previously). If the entire track editingwill skip this screen easily.

• If you have entered the desired range (or the wholeWant to transpose track), press Enter • Save .

55 Shift TrackTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 5

Shift TrackWith this function, all events in a track to aspecific value forward or moved backward. Also herethe smallest unit of the clock pulse. (A quarter note is 96 clocks).Thus, the subjective perception of timing of a track can be improvedbe. Especially with drum tracks the shifting makes aClocks few very positive impact. In addition, with the shift -Create Function interesting echo effects when you copy a trackand then delayed by a rhythmic value.

• Select the shift function and press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>



Number of clocks

to shift by: +00

10-39

Page 218


10-40

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can nowEnter the value for the shift. Positive values move theEvents in stroke further back, more negative forward to topout.Range: -96 to +96, with 96 Clocks Virtelnote a match.• Press Enter • Save .

Note: For the shift function not edit range can be set.

56 Scale TrackTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 6

Scale TrackWith the scale function of the value of each controller can in a track tobe a certain value increased or decreased. This can be usedFor example, take back strong modulations or the stopdynamics increase. For this to be an important financial designmedium in the post of tracks.

• Select the Scale parameter and press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>



Scale: VELOCITY

by factor: 0.00

Scale factor

Controller

• In the top line you can enter the controller now, theto be processed:

VELOCITY - Velocity RELEASE - Release ControllerModWheel - Modulation EXT CONTRL - Ext controller.PEDAL - foot pedal ALL CONTRL - All controllersVOLUME - Volume Pedal CHN PRESSR - Channel AftertouchSUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volumeSOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramicTimbral - Timbre controller PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheel

Page 219


• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down Cursor Now set theA factor by which the controller is to be increased or decreased. HereThere are actually two parameter (fracture). Prior to the point, the count(0-9), behind the denominator (.00 - .99). While values less than 1.00,higher increase the modulation.

10-41


• If you have set everything, press Enter • Save .

57 Filter EventsTrack Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 7

Filter EventsThe filter function can be targeted at specific events (notes,Clear controller, program change, etc.) from a track, orPost in another track to copy. The filter function has thereforetwo modes, Erase (Delete) and Copy (Copy).• Select the filter function and press Enter • Save :

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>



ERASE MOD WHEEL

ControllerFilter Mode

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to determinehere, which events are to be filtered:

ModWheel - Modulation ALL CONTRL - All controllersPEDAL - foot pedal CHN PRESSR - Channel AftertouchVOLUME - Volume Pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volumeSUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramicSOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheelTimbral - Timbre controller CHNG PROGRAM - Program ChangeRELEASE - Release Controller KEY PRESSR - Polyphonic aftertouchEXT CONT - Ext controller. KEY EVENTS - Only the note events

Page 220



• If you have set the range (or not), pressEnter • Save .

• Now you need to select the mode, erase or copy. In "COPY"the screen will look like this:

COPY MOD WHEEL

ControllerFilter Mode

To Track 1

• To copy the data to another track, select theEvent type and the target track.

• only target a certain area will be copied in the track, press theRight cursor and set the range. If not, pressSimply enter • Save .

10-42

Note: If you selected the Copy mode, shows the KS-32 afterCopy the new track. Do you want the copied events from theClear origin track, repeat the procedure with the oldTrack in Erase mode.

60 Quantize TrackTrack Quantize Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Quantize Track (Bank 6) / Screen 0th

Quantize TrackThe Quantize function (auto-correction) can rhythmically dirty notesa track on any note value correct way. Is in the KS-32always nachquantisiert, ie only is taken, and then quantized.You can use any note value to 1/64 triplets for quantization.• Select the Quantize function. The display shows:

SEQ ##

QUANTIZE TRACK

STOP

Current sequenceor song

SequencerStatus

Indicates that the currentTrack contains notes

£

Page 221


• Press Enter • Save . Then appears:

Track = 1

<SEQUENCE NAME>


• Press the right cursor . The display will then: "Quantize tonearest XX. "

• Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor setNow the desired note value to be quantized to the:

1/4 - Quarter 1 / 16T - semiquaver triplets1 / 4T - Quarter triplet 1/32 - Zweiunddreißigstel1/8 - Eighth 1 / 32T - thirty-second triplet1 / 8T - eighth triplet 1/64 - sixty-fourth1/16 - sixteenth 1 / 64T - sixty-fourth triplet

• The note values listed are shown in musical notation.• Press the right cursor again and set the

Editing a, as previously described. (You want the wholeQuantize track, skip this screen easily.)

• If you have set the range (or not), pressEnter • Save .

70 Track Mute StatusMute Tracks Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / mute tracks (Bank 7) / Screen 0th

SEQ 01 Trk01 -

Status = -PP-M-PM

10-43

1Tracks

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Track Mute statusThis parameter determines the mute status of each of the eightTracks the current sequence or song. The status of the currentTracks flashes. Use the left / right cursor keys or the Track buttonsselect to the track to be edited. Use the Data EntryController or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the track muteTo change status.

Page 222


10-44

There are four different settings:

• M - mute. The track will not play.• P - Play. This track is playing, along with other tracks

Status P.• S - Solo. The current track is played alone without the other

Tracks. When a track is soloed, automatically all otherTracks set to mute. But you can also buy several solo trackshear.

• "-" - bottom line. If you see a line in the display is on thecorresponding track recorded anything. Have in this stateData Entry Knob and Up • Yes / No- • Down cursor noFunction.

KS-32 user guide Part 11 - Storage

11-1

Part 11 - Storage

With the memory functions under Store Seqs and store sounds ( Bank 9 found)You have the following options:• Transfer of sound and sequence data to and from KS-32 compatible memory cards.• Transmission of sounds and sequences via MIDI System Exclusive messages.

Memory card storage ............................................. ....................... 11-1Insert the battery in a RAM card .................................... 11-1Memory card configurations ............................................. .... 11-2Formatting an empty card .............................................. ........ 11-2Save sounds on memory card ..................................... 11-3Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 4Storing sequence data on memory card ..................... 11-5About the sequencer memory ............................................. .......... 11-5Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 6

MIDI SYS-EX-storage ........................................... ....................... 11-7Sending MIDI Sys Ex data from the KS-32 .............................. 11-7Send one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex ................ 11-7Send sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex ......................... 11-8Receive MIDI SysEx data ......................................... ...... 11-9

Memory card storageThe KS-32 uses flat memory cards for storing soundssequences and / songs. You can only ENSONIQ -Cards, orENSONIQ tested cards are used. Related cards from otherManufacturer for other instruments may be incompatible and the KS-32damage.

Insert the battery in a RAM cardTo extend the life of the battery, are MC-32 and MC-64RAM cards shipped without a built-in battery. Prior to use,must be only used it so. This goes as follows.

2

3

Battery

Batterycompartment

Front LabelSide of the card

Contact-edge

1

5

4

Screwdriver(Supplied)

Front LabelSide of the card

1. Solve using the suppliedScrewdriver, remove the battery compartmentScrew. Let the screwstuck: it remains in the tray.

2. Gently pull on the capat the upper end of the card to theTo open the battery compartment (only so faras shown in Fig. right).

3. Insert the battery with theflat side (+) side up in theBattery compartment.

4. Slide the battery compartmentback to the card.

5. Tighten the screw againin order to close the tray.

Page 224

Part 11 - Storage KS-32 user guide

Memory card configurationsThe ENSONIQ MC-32 RAM Cards Up to two banks of sounds(CARD A and B CARD) and / or sequencer data store. There issplit several ways, such as the location of a cardcan be. The illustration shows these configurations:

= 16kA CARDSounds

EmptySequencer

DataMC-32

(32K RAMCard)

A CARDSoundsCARD BSounds

A CARDSounds

SequencerData

1 2 3 4

11-2

Possible RAM card configurations

• A blank memory card is copying the internal sounds (INT)automatically formatted. These 80 sounds are then in CARD A.Rest of the card remains free.

• You can then again after 80 sounds CARD copy B (Fig.2)or the contents of the sequencer (Fig. 3).

• A blank memory card is when you copy the sequencerMemory contents automatically formatted, and is then a pureSequencer memory card (Fig.4).

Important : How much space is available for sequence data available dependson how much space on the card is still unused when the firstTime sequencer data is copied. That is, a blank cardis then completely for sequence data. So make sure,that previously were still no sounds on the card. Have you ever Soundson your card, and you want but then completely for sequencer datause, delete it completely by the battery again forRemove about 1 minute and then reinstated.

It is also important that sounds are accessed directly from the cardcan while sequencer data first to the internal sequencerStorage must be reloaded before you playcan.

Formatting a blank cardIf you used the first time the battery into a new RAM cardhave, the KS-32 does not recognize them only once, until it is formatted. Theis easily done by a sound bank or sequencer datastore. With a new card you must then decide whetherYou want to use it for sounds, sequences, or both, before theyformat.

Page 225


SOUNDSSave sounds on memory card

The function described here is used as a block of 80 soundsinternal memory to play card, and vice versa. In Additionmust, as described above, first sounds in CARD A be copied,so that the card even has sound format. If you only want onesave single sound, proceed as described in Part 5 - Basics ofSound programming has been described.

To dub sound banks from the internal memory to card:

• Press the Edit Sound - button.• Select the store sounds at -Bank by Bank 9 press. In the

Display shows:

Press ENTER to

Store Sounds

• Press Enter • Save . Now you can select the storage type.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor enter "Storage

Type = MEMORY CARD "a:

Storage Grade =

MEMORY CARD

11-3

• Press Enter • Save . Now there are four possibilities:

• "Operation = COPY TO CARD INT A" - this command is thefull contents of the eight INT benches (0-7) stored on A CARD.

• "Operation = COPY TO CARD INT B" - this command is thefull contents of the eight banks IBT (0-7) stored on CARD B.

• "Operation = A COPY CARD TO INT" - with this command allA CARD sounds loaded into the internal memory (INT).

• "Operation = COPY CARD TO INT B" - with this command allLoading CARD B sounds to the internal memory (INT)

• If you have selected the correct function, then press Enter • Save .• If the card has been empty or unformatted, and COPY TO INT

CARD A is selected, you will be asked: "Card is wrong type,erase? ". Confirm with Yes • Up cursor .

• Immediately after you see "Command Successful" to confirm.

Page 226


Informational and error messages• "Sorry! Install a RAM card first. "- This message appears when

no card or a card ROM (Read Only Memory) in the card slotinfected.

• "Sorry! Install a First Card. "- This message appears when noCard is inserted in the slot.

• "Sorry! Write to Card A first. "- This message do you get whenINT TO CARD B try without first sounds in CARD Ato have saved. CARD A must always be first recorded.

• "Sorry! Card B is empty. "This message appears when you CARD BTO INT try the card is formatted indeed, CARD B but noSounds contains.

• "Erase sequencer data on card?" If you INT TO CARD B tryand contains the card already sequencer data in this area. PushYou Up • Yes cursor , if you want to delete this sequencer data, or• No Down cursor , if you want to cancel the command.

• "Sorry, write to card failed." - This message always appearswhen the KS-32 compares after saving card and internal dataand does not recognize. This may mean that it is a ROM-cardis, and can not be described. But it can also meanthat the card is secured or defective

• "WARNING! Battery low. See manual. "- If this messageappears and puts a RAM card in the slot of the KS-32, you willinformed that the battery decreases in the card and as soon as possibleshould be replaced. To replace the battery, you cansame procedure as described at the beginning of this part. DoTo do so, while the card in the slot of the KS-32 plug and the deviceswitched ISTT, its data are retained, andare not deleted. This does not damage the card nor the KS-32.(Make sure that the KS-32 is powered on!)

11-4

Page 227


11-5

SEQUENCESStoring sequence data on memory card

You can save the contents of the sequencer on MC-32 RAM card.

To secure sequencer data from internal memory to card:

• Press the Edit SeqPreset - button.• Select the store Seqs to-Bank by Bank 9 press. In the

Display shows:

Press ENTER to

Store Sequences

• Press Enter • Save . Now you can select the storage type.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor enter "Storage

Type = MEMORY CARD "a:

Storage Grade =

MEMORY CARD

• Press Enter • Save . There are two options:

• "Operation = COPY ALL TO CARD" -By this command, theentire sequencer data from internal memory to card dubbed.That is the right choice when you back up your sequences and songswant.

• "Operation = COPY FROM ALL CARD" - Use this command to getSequence data from the card to the internal sequencer memoryback.

• If you have selected the correct function, pressEnter • Save.

• Immediately after you see "Command Successful" in the display asConfirmation that all went well.

Via the sequencer memoryWithout the optional memory expansion available in KS-32 is about 36k of RAMMemory for the sequencer available. The MC-32 RAM-memory-cardHowever, only about 32k. This has the consequence that when attempting toTo secure sequencer memory contents on Card, you may receive the message"Sorry! Need more space on Card. "Appears. This is simply aLimitation of the storage medium.

Page 228


To determine how much free memory must be available to allTo secure sequences on card (which was formatted for sequencesis):

11-6

• Press Edit Seq / Preset, followed by Control - Bank button ( Bank1 ), and then screen 6 .

• If the display shows the remaining available memory location 13% or moreto the capacity of MC-32 is sufficient on each case.

• If the display shows 11%, the MC-32 is not sufficient and for the"Sorry. , . "Message appears.

• If the display shows 12%, the MC-32 range or not. Itdepends on the exact number of bytes to be stored(1% free space approximately 360 bytes).

Note: Keep in mind that the available balance memory for devices with sequencerExtension must of course be greater. This is also true if youSequences want to store on a card offering sounds and sequenceshas been formatted.

Informational and error messages• "Sorry! Install a RAM card first. "- This message appears when you

ALL TO CARD try and no or a ROM card (Read OnlyMemory) is in the slot of the KS-32.

• "Sorry! Install a Seq Card First. "- This message appears when youALL FROM CARD and try the card is unformatted orSound data contains.

• "Erase Sound data on Card B?" - This message you see when youSequencer data will be saved on a card that already CARD BSounds contains. If you Up • Yes typing, these sounds will be deletedand the memory provided again for sequencer data. WithDown • No remains only the rest of the remaining memory for sequencingData left.

If z. B. work with a MC-32, and already CARD A and CARDB sounds are stored on this card is on the Yes CARD BCleared area and saved the sequencer data at this point.Press No, the process is simply broken.

• "Sorry, write to card failed." - This message always appearsif the KS-32 compares after saving card and internal dataand does not recognize. This may mean that it is a ROM-cardis, and can not be described. But it can also meanthat the card is secured or defective.

Page 229


• "Sorry, need more space on card." - This message appears when onthe card does not have enough space for the entire sequencerMemory content is left. Then try superfluous sequences orDelete songs, or delete data from the sound card. IfNot both, try to back up your data via MIDI Sys Ex,is as described on the following page.

• "Sorry, need expanded RAM." - This message appears when ALLFROM CARD when the internal memory is not sufficient to the contentthe card transfer. This is the case when sequencer data froma KS-32 transferred with expanded memory to a device withoutwant.

• "WARNING! Battery low. See manual. "- If this messageappears and puts a RAM card in the slot of the KS-32, you willinformed that the battery decreases in the card and as soon as possibleshould be replaced. To replace the battery, you cansame procedure as described at the beginning of this part. DoTo do so, while the card in the slot of the KS-32 infected , remain theobtain data on it, and will not be deleted. The

11-7

does not damage the card nor the KS-32. (Make sure that the KS32 is on it!)

MIDI SYS-EX-storageSending MIDI SysEx data from the KS-32 to an external MIDIDevice

The KS-32 is capable of sounds and sequencer data as systemTo send exclusive messages via MIDI and receive. These datacan receive from another KS-32 or a MIDI systemEx-recorder (like many software sequencer or ENSONIQ EPS-16 PLUSand SD-1) are stored, to be later reloaded.Sound banks are always transferred from the internal memory via MIDI.Card sounds must therefore first loaded into the internal memorybe before you can send them via MIDI dump.

SOUNDSSend one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex

• Press the Edit Sound button.• Select the store sounds - Bank by Bank 9 press. In the

Display shows:

Press ENTER to

Store Sounds

• Press Enter • Save . In the display you can use the storage mediumsearch.

Page 230


• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor set this to "Storage Type = MIDISYS-EX "a:

Storage Grade =

MIDI SYS-EX

• Press Enter • Save . There are then two possibilities:

• "Operation = SAVE INT TO MIDI" - this command is the com-tents of the storage (banks 0-7) sent. These are 80 sounds.

• "Operation = SAVE TO MIDI SOUND" - this command is onlysent the currently selected sound via MIDI. It may consist of anyStorage area come, so INT, ROM, or CARD A CARD B.

• Have you left one, then press Enter • Save . The displayappears "Please wait. , , sending data "while the transfer is in progress.

SEQUENCER DATASend sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex

• Press the Edit Seq / Preset - button.• Select the Store Seqs -Bank to by Bank 9 press. In the

Display shows:

Press ENTER to

Store Sequences

• Press Enter • Save . The display will kuonnen the storage medium. Select

• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor select "Storage Type = MIDISYS-EX "to:

11-8

Storage Grade =

MIDI SYS-EX

• Press Enter • Save . There are two options:• "Operation = SAVE CURRENT SEQ / SONG" - this command is

the currently selected sequence / song sent via MIDI.• "Operation = SAVE ALL SEQUENCES" - This command is the

sent entire sequencer memory contents via MIDI. Contains the dumpSo 70 sequences and 30 songs.

• Have you left one, then press Enter • Save . The displayappears "Please wait. , , sending data "during transmission.

Page 231


11-9

Receive MIDI SysEx dataThe reception of MIDI SysEx data is done automatically when thestarts sending device to transmit. This requires no specialInput is required, provided that the receiving MIDI Sys-EXData is under Screen 8 System • MIDI enabled. (Excl system = ON).

If a single Sound is received via MIDI, three things happen:• The display shows "Press ENTER to Save New Sound"• The new sound ends up in the edit buffer, and• the KS-32 enters the Sound Edit mode, which by flashing

corresponding LED is signaled. Then you can up the soundchange before stores it in the desired location.

If a single sequence o. A single song via MIDI receiveis this lands on the lowest free space. The songcorresponding to the lowest free song space. After that isthis new sequence o. the new song dialed immediately.

Page 233

KS-32 user guide Part 12 - Examples of application

12-1

Part 12 - Examples of application

This part will give you a step-by-step instructions for some of thegive the most common uses of the KS-32 and also discusses somefurther sequencer application examples, including theApplication of the KS-32 with various external MIDI devices. ThisPart will help you become even better with the KS-32 and itsTo make familiar ways.

Using the KS-32 with drum machines ......................................... ..... 12-1Song Position Pointer ............................................. ............................... 12-2MIDI Song Select ............................................. ..................................... 12-2The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controller ........................................ ..... 12-3Creating your own drum kits ............................................ ............. 12-4

Editing Voices ............................................... ...................... 12-5Setting the keys scope ............................................... ........ 12-6Save the edited drum kits ......................................... 12-7

Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sources .12 - 8MIDI connectors ............................................... ........................... 12-8Selection of Multi-mode ............................................. ............ 12-8MIDI mode and channel - receiving instruments ...................... 12-9MIDI track configuration ............................................. .............. 12-9

Using the KS-32 with drum machinesIf you operate the KS-32 together with a drum machinewant, there are basically three options:1) Synchronize the drum machine with the KS-32;2) Synchronize the KS-32 with the drum machine, or3) Play the Drums in the KS-32 sequencer, like other MIDI

Devices also.To synchronize the drum machine with the KS-32:• Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 with MIDI In of the drum computer.• Set the drum machine to MIDI Clock or MIDI Sync.• Set the drum machine to a unused MIDI channel

OMNI OFF; or filter, if possible, all channel informationout. The sounds are not to be triggered directly. MIDI clock,Start and stop are MIDI real-time messages , irrespective of the channelbe transferred.

• The drum machine is now completely controlled by the KS-32. PushYou play the KS-32, and the drum machine starts.

To the KS-32 sync with the drum machine:• Connect the MIDI Out of the drum computer with MIDI In of the KS-32.• Ask about the KS-32 MIDI clock. Given in the Control Bank ,

Screen 2 Set "Clock = MIDI".• Adjust the drum machine that he no channel messages

transfers, or do not give it a MIDI channel on which the KS-32receives. Here again are clock information and start / stopCommands transmitted channel independently.

• The KS-32 is now synchronized by the drum machine, and shouldalways run with if the drum machine is running.

Page 234

Part 12 - Examples of application KS-32 user guide

To record drums in the sequencer of the KS-32:• Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 with MIDI In of the drum computer.• Make sure the drum machine on Tape Sync or External Clock

at least not internal or MIDI clock. This prevents that theDrum machine itself is running. He is now pure sound module.

• Set the drum machine to POLY mode (OMNI OFF) andselect a MIDI channel.

• In the MIDI Control Bank of KS-32 give a free track theMIDI channel of the drum computer and enter as a fashion MIDI.

• You should now the sounds of the drum machine on the keyboard of KS

12-2

32 have when the track is selected. You can use your rhythmPatterns now easily record in the KS-32 sequencer and save aswith each MIDI expander.

The advantage of this method is that some velocity-sensitive drum machinemik process much better when you get out of a dynamic keyboardbe played, from the built-in drum pads. The disadvantage is thatthereby sequencer memory is consumed in the KS-32.

Song Position PointerThe KS-32 sends and receives MIDI Song Position PointerInformation. Song Position Pointer say a sequencer or drumComputer, where in the song he is to be located.

Receives the KS-32 such Song Position Pointer, he jumps eye-blicklich to the corresponding point in the song.

The KS-32 will transmit a Song Position Pointer nformation via MIDI, ifThey used the auto-locate function to a certain pointjump (see "Goto" in the Locate -Bank). Each receiving device,the processes this information, then also jumps to that location.(Not every device receives this Song Position Pointer. Look at therelevant owner's manual for this device when youis unclear.)

MIDI Song SelectWith MIDI Song Select commands, in a connected externalSequencer or drum machine, a certain song is called,when a sequence or a song is selected. Whether these commandssent and received, with the "Song Select" parameterunder System • MIDI, Screen 8 determined.

The KS-32 sends and receives MIDI Song Select messages both inSequence mode, as well as in the Song mode. This allows each songSpace can be selected in the KS-32 from the outside. The settingcarried out as follows:

MIDI song Selects # 00-99 call in the KS-32 memory locations # 00-99.

Page 235


Conversely, when you select a memory location # 00-99 in the KS-32 byMIDI Song Select # 00-99 sent.

The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controllerThe KS-32 is ideal as a sound module for MIDI GuitarController, which sends the MIDI MONO mode. The MONO mode (MIDIMode 4) allows a guitar controller, the notes on each stringto send its own MIDI channel. Only with this method, thetypical expressions of the guitarist on a synthesizerbe transferred.

Some older Guitar Synthesizers have no MONO mode. You shouldlook in the instruction manual of the instrument, whetherit works or not. If your guitar synthesizer only in POLY modesends (ie all six strings on a single MIDI channel) should the KS-32also in the POLY (or OMNI) mode provides. The Guitar Synth shouldtransmit on the channel that has the KS-32 as the base channel.

For MIDI guitar controller with MONO mode offers the KS-32 twoMONO different modes of. The first, MONO mode A, provides theAdvantages of the MONO mode without consuming more tracks:

• Connect the MIDI Out of your guitar controller (or converter) withMIDI In of the KS-32.

• Tune your guitar controller MONO mode with the transmitA 1-6 channels. (For some there is a shortcut for it.)

• Establish under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as the base for channel 1.

12-3

• Establish under System • MIDI, Screen 6 now the MIDI mode to "MIDIFashion a MONO = A ". Now receives the KS-32 monophonic eightdifferent MIDI channels, starting with the basic channel (more on thisin Part 2 of this manual).

Now you can call sounds or presets on the KS-32, or via MIDIPlaying program change automatically dial, and the guitar controllerthis sounds like from the keyboard.If you are feeling more adventurous, and the various stringsthe guitar still want to equip with different sounds that canTry the MONO B-mode. Now each string has its own trackthe current sequence and receives monophonic on the correspondingMIDI channel. This mode corresponds to the MULTI mode, however,monophonic for each track. Also the program can now change the waybe managed independently.

• Set under System • MIDI, Screen 6 as a MIDI Mode "MONO B".The eight tracks of the current preset now receive monophonic on theirMIDI channels.

• Create a new preset. You might call it "MONO-B IN"or something like that, so you know that it is specifically designed for this modeis.

Page 236


• Set the first six tracks sounds of your choice. The remain-reproduced two remain empty.

• Press the Edit Track button, followed by Screen 4 . Here you Koenennow set the MIDI channels of the tracks. In contrast to MONO Ahappens here automatically. You have six differentSetting channels.

Now's go. Note nor the following:• notes on one string only playing one track. Each string / track

Pair is completely independent.• You can check the sound of each track either manually (using the REPLACE

Track Sound function) or via MIDI program change from yourSwitch Controller.

• Each track offers its own program change. In many cases,You probably want on all strings have the same sound. Theybut can also program splits, eg. as a bass sound on the Eand A strings and a piano sound on the other four strings. When youlike to experiment, lie times on each string to anotherSound.

• It would be handy abzuspeicherm the preset for this application separately(Z. B. on card), so you do not accidentally sounds in an exist-existing sequence switch.

• If your guitar controller certain controller on a separateCan transmit channel to affect all tracks (like a vibratoLever) you have for a separate controller channel. This is alwaysBase channel -1. Is the base channel 1, is the Global controller channel sixteenth

Creating your own drum kitsProblem: You have a sequence with a specific drum kit created,but some voices in this kit you do not like.

Solution: You can change the voices and their keys scope change andby custom drum kits.

12-4

Page 237


12-5

Editing Voices• Select at the drum kit that you used in your sequence,

by pressing the track button on which it is located. In Part 1 - Tutorialwe have a sequence with the "Big Ol 'Rock Kit" on track 1was added. We use the same drum kit for our example.

• Each time you want to edit a sound is to the KS-32first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done by pressing theEdit Sound - button. The display will look like this:

Key = C2 C1 : E2

ELECTRIC KICK

Current number keys Lo Key Hi Key

Waveform name

• Decide which voice (ie what kind of sound) replacingwant by playing the appropriate key on the keyboard. In theDisplay shows the correct key, the waveform name and theRange of this voice.

• When you have decided which voice is to be replaced,make sure that this can also be seen in the display (bythe corresponding key on the keyboard to play).

• Press Wave (bank 0) and 1 screen . The display looks like this:

Wave = DRUM WAVE

ELECTRIC KICK

Waveform class

Waveform name

• You can now use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • No-Cursor through the various waveform classes, scroll to thehave found the sound you want.

• Press Play to listen to the sequence with the newly electedWaveform. You can scroll through the sounds, to thehave found the desired sound.

• If you play other keys on the keyboard, you can see the displaythe waveform and the waveform of the class entschprechenden voice.With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can alsoreplace the sounds here. This applies to all 17 voices within eachDrum kits.

Page 238


Setting the keys scope

12-6

The "Big Ol 'drum kit" is, like all other drum kits, 17Different Voices divided:

ClosedHas

PedalHas

RideCymbal

CrashCymbal SideStickSnare

OpenHas

CowbellTamBorine

ElectricKick OpenHas

ReverseSnare

RoomSnareRoomTom Low

RoomTom High

Big Ol 'Rock KitDrum Map

ElectricKickCrashCymbal

MetallicDink

Even if you have already exchanged the voices, theKeyboard range of voices still the same. In umserem example,we want to change a pair of keyboard zones.• you know: Every time you want to edit a sound that has theKS-32 stand first in the Sound Edit mode. This is done by pressingthe Edit Sound button. The display looks like this:

Key = A4 A4 : D5 #

ROOM TOM LOW Waveform

Current number keys Lo Key Hi Key

• In our example, we will change the keyboard range for TOM ROOMLOW, HIGH and ROOM TOM SNARE SIDE STICK.

• the ROOM TOM LOW on (by a key from SelectA4 and D5 # key) and make sure that this sound evenis shown in the display.

• Press the right cursor twice, until the value for high-keyflashes.

• Press # C5. You just used the tonal range of the ROOM TOMLOW changed.

• Now select ROOM TOM HIGH on (by a key fromE5 B5 and press) and make sure that this sound inDisplay is shown.

• Press the right cursor once to the value for low-keyto select.

• Press D5. The display will automatically change to high-key.Press G5. You have now the range for the ROOM TOMLOW reset.

• Select the SNARE SIDE STICK to (by either C6or press # C6) and make sure that this sound inDisplay is shown.

Page 239


• Press the right cursor once to the Lo Key parameters toreach.

• Press # G5. The display will automatically change to high-key. Weleave the value for high-key as it is. Simply press theRight Cursor twice. You have now the range for the ROOMTOM LOW reset.

With this technique, you can each Drum Voice of the KS-32 inEdit range.

Save the edited drum kits• If you have your favorite drum sound found, you can

Set by pressing the Enter • Save button to save. The display shows"Save SOUND <Sound name>?" (The name of the kit that allows you toto have started editing). We recommend that you edited theTo give drum kit a new name so that it not latercan confuse the set in ROM.

• Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor -

12-7

• Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor -Select keys on the spot during data entry control andUp • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons for the choice of lettersAvailable (slide the Data Entry knob all the way down,get a space).

• If you have entered the name, press Enter • Save -Button.

• Now select the bank and Screen - buttons to select a location forthe new kit (you know: The banks 8 and 9 are fixed ROM banksfor drum kits). You see here the names of the sounds on therespective memory locations are. Look for a space witha sound that you no longer need. The sounds in memorycan also be listened to at this point by theCOMPARE button between the stored and you are editing sound at this locationforth.

• Have you found the right place, you again press theEnter • Save button. Short "SAVED" appears on the display before the lastParameter appears again.

Now that you have the "ultimate drum kit" is stored into memory,you need to fit it only in the corresponding track of the sequence.To do this:

• Press the Track button to the original drum kit.• Press the Replace-track sound button.• Select the memory location where now the new edited Drum

Set has been saved.

Page 240


Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sourcesTask: You want to use the KS-32 to MIDI information totransferred to other MIDI devices and their sounds in a KS-32To use sequence, or use a live set.

Solution: You can create a "pattern" preset that for this purposeis ready created. A KS-32 Sequence / Preset can also click Soundsaccess external devices, allowing the selection of sounds, of course, enormouslyincreased.

After you have made the necessary connections and MIDIParameters of tracks set properly, you may all sound from the KS-32achieve in your rack

MIDI connectorsBefore you can control external sounds via MIDI, you mustindividual instruments first connect to the KS-32 and each other.As the following figure shows:



MIDI Out

MIDI InMIDI Thru

MIDI In


MIDI Thru MIDI In

to another MIDIInstruments

MIDI Thru

KS-32

Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 to the MIDI In of the first

12-8

Instrument. Then connect the MIDI Thru to the MIDI In of thesecond instrument. From the MIDI Thru the second it goes on toMIDI In the third instrument, and so on.

With this arrangement, and the correct MIDI channels plays eachInstrument only what it is to play and gives the other data to otherFurther instrument (MIDI Thru sockets forward incoming MIDI datajust continue, however, transfer not know what the specific instrumentitself plays).

Selection of Multi-modeThe MULTI mode gives access to Einsazt of the KS-32 as MIDIMaster Keyboard for external MIDI instruments. In MULTI mode, send8 tracks of the current sequence / the song regardless polyphonic MIDIInformation on up to 8 different channels.

Page 241


• Press System • MIDI , followed by 6 screen . The display looks like thisfrom:

FlashesMIDI OMNI mode =

Xctrl = 02

• Use the Up • Yes cursor a "MIDI Mode = MULTI".

MIDI mode and channel - receiving instrumentsThe next step is that every connected MIDI instrument onlyMIDI receives information that are assigned to him. If eachreceiving device is set to a different MIDI channel (ormore, for devices with MULTI mode), you can all separated from KS32 check.

For each controlled instrument:

• Set POLY (OMNI OFF) or MULTI mode. Eachdriven instrument must be in a MIDI mode where it onlya specific MIDI channel receives (or multiple).Usually, the POLY mode for reception is at one and the MULTIFashion for reception on several unambhängigen channels. AddressRefer to the information in the operating instructions for eachDevices.

• Select one or more MIDI channels. The best thing is everyInstrument assign fixed channels and to have them adjusted.If you know for example, that a particular synthesizer alwaysreceives on channel 4, you can use the KS-32 quickly create a trackand the track edit mode the MIDI status to "Status = MIDI" and"MIDI Chan = 4" position. So if you have a fixed channel schemecomply, you can be sure of getting the right tools withto hear the correct sounds.

Have your personal channel scheme found please subscribeeverything on and set the paper easily accessible near yourKS-32.

MIDI track configurationIf you made all MIDI connections and the receivingInstruments have set properly, you can now track aSetting the sequence / a preset so that MIDI data to the individualSent instruments. Suppose you want multiple MIDIInstruments used in the sequencer, as shown in the figure on theprevious page displayed.

12-9

Page 242


12-10

For each track, which is to control an external MIDI instrument:• Press the Select Seq / Preset - button.• Press the desired Track - button.• Press the Edit Track - button.• Press the Screen 4 - button.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the MIDI channel of the

a receiving instrument.• Press the right cursor button.• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select a MIDI

Program number.• Press Screen 5 .• Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to adjust the track status

"MIDI".

Repeat these steps for each track, the external MIDIShould control instrument. Once you have created a template,do you save only in the KS-32:

• Press the Enter • Save- button. Depending on whether you are a sequence asHave chosen pattern or not, SEQ Save message "<SeqName>? "Or" Save Preset <Seq name>? "(The listed hereName of the sequence / the presets with the / where you started).

• Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor -Select keys on the spot during data entry control and• Yes Up / Down • No-cursor - keys to select the lettersAvailable (slide the Data Entry knob all the way down,get a space).

• If you have entered the name, press Enter • SaveButton.

• The display briefly shows "SAVED" appears and then the last selectedParameters.

After the pattern sequence has been created and saved, canShe recalled at any time, by selecting the Select Seq / Preset buttonpress, followed by the corresponding bank and Screen - keys to move theDisplay space.

Page 243

KS-32 user guide Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation

The KS-32 has an extensive MIDI (Musical InstrumentDigital Interface) implementation. For normal applications, seeall information about the MIDI functions of the KS-32 in thisInstructions. You can also use the list on the Implementationsconsult the following page.

A - 1

If you write your own computer software that work with the KS-32should you get a full MIDI specification for the KS-32 underthe following address:

Sound Accessories Audio Team GmbHProduct DivisionPaul-Ehrlich-Str. 28-30 G363322 Rödermark

Set up your written request with the exact name and address,and serial number of your instrument and source (Dealer) tothis address. Delivery can take 2 - last 3 weeks.

Page 244

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation KS-32 user guide

KS-32 MIDI Implementations list

Version: 1.0MODEL: KS-32 MIDI Implementation Chart

11- 16

21-108

11- 16

1, 3, 4, multi-

Function ... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

BasicChannel

DefaultChannel

FashionDefaultMessagesAltered

NoteNumber True Voice

Velocity Note ONNote OFF

AnusTouch

Key'sCh's

Pitch Bender

ControlChange

memorized

21-108

programmable

* After 100 & 101 is received

(Global Controllersin MONO mode)

1

0 Bank Select MSB1 Mod Wheel4 Foot

Volume 732 Bank Select LSB64 Sustain66 Sostenuto71 timbre parameters

1-95 XCtrl0 Bank Select MSB1 Mod Wheel4 Foot6 Data Entry *Volume 732 Bank Select LSB64 Sustain66 Sostenuto71 timbre parameters

A - 2

System Exclusive

SystemCommon

Song PosSong SelTune

SystemReal Time

Clock: Commands

AuxMeasurementsages

Local On / OffAll Notes Off: Active Sense: Reset

Notes

ProgChange True #

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLYMode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONOMode 4: OMNI OFF MONO

: YES: NO

0 - 127 0-119, 123-127

ClockStart, Stop, Cont

ClockStart, Stop, Cont

71 timbre parameters72 Release parameters100 Registered Param Select101 Registered Param Select

71 timbre parameters72 Release parameters100 Registered Param Select101 Registered Param Select

Page 245

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Standard Sounds

Edit Sound button

Bank buttons

Screen keys



Select

DrumsDrums

Sound

EditSound

BankSet

ReleaseChannelProgram

ROMA Card


Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

In order to achieve the standard sounds-mode parameters:• Press the large Edit Sound - button. The LED above it lights up.• Press a narrow bank - button (first digit of the number) and then a broader

Screen key (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Wave Bank Env 2 Bank00 -Select VOICE / Voice Status 50 -Level / Time01 -wave Class / Individual Wave 51 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve02 -Delay Time / Direction 52 -mode / Keyboard Tracking03 -Start Index / Mod Source and Amount 53 -Select Defaults04 -Voice Restrike Decay Time05 -Change Sound Mode Amp Bank

60 -Level / TimePitch Bank 61 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve10 oct / Semi / Fine 62 -mode / Keyboard Tracking11 -Env1 / LFO / Mod Source and Amount 63 -Select Defaults12 Keyboard On Pitch Tracking13 -Glide / Glide Time Output Bank

70 by volume / Boost / Mod Source and Amount1 Env-Bank 71 Keyboard On Scale Amount / Key Range20 -Level / Time 72 -Output bus / Priority21 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve 73 -Pan Location / Velocity Window22 -mode / Keyboard Tracking23 -Select Defaults Effects Bank

Varies depending on the selected effect.LFO Bank30 -LFO speed / noise rate Store Sounds Bank31 -Level / Delay / Mod Source 90 -Press ENTER to Store Sounds Screen32 -wave / restart

Filter-bank40 1 filter / filter 2

41 filter cutoff frequency 1/2 Envelope42 -FC1 Keyboard / Mod Source and Amount43 -FC2 Cutoff / Envelope 244 -FC2 Keyboard / FC1 Mod -> FC2

Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters bysimply select the appropriate bank button repeatedly until the desiredParameter appears.

Page 246

KS-32 Parameter Reference - sequences / presets

WavePitchEnv1 LFO Env2 Amp Output SoundsFilter


DrumsDrums


ROMA Card


Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

Bank buttons

Screen keys

EditSeq / Preset

Seq / PresetSelect

TrackEdit

LayerLock

Edit Seq / PresetButton

To achieve the sequences / presets mode parameters:• Press the large Edit Seq / Preset - button. The LED above it lights up.• Press a narrow bank - button (first digit of the number) and then a broader

Screen key (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Locate Bank Seq Commands Bank00 -Sequence / song Location 40 -Create SEQ / Pset01 -Sequence / Song Punch In 41 -Copy Sequence02 -Sequence / song Punch Out 42 -erase SEQ / Pset03 Punch -Auto / Tempo 43 -Sequencer info

44 -rename SEQ / PsetControl Bank 45 -Copy Preset Data10 -Loop / Countoff 46 -Append Sequence11 -Step Entry / Record 47 -Change Length12 Punch -Auto / Clock13 uses -Song effect from: Track Commands Bank14 -Song Edit Tracks Displayed 50 -Event Edit Track15 prompt to Save Changes 51 -Copy Track16 -Total Sequencer Free Memory 52 -erase Track17 -Reinitialize Sequencer 53 -merge Track

54 -Transpose TrackClick-Bank 55 -shift Track20 -Click / Interval 56 -scale Track21 -Click Volume / Pan Click 57 filter events22 tempo like

Quantize track-bankSong Commands Bank 60 -Quantize Track30 -Create SONG / Pset31 -Copy song Muted Tracks Bank32 -erase SONG / Pset 70 • Track Mute Status33 -Song Information34 -rename SONG / Pset Effects Bank35 -Copy Preset Data Varies depending on the selected effect.36 -Edit Song Steps

Store Seqs Bank90 -Press ENTER to Store Sequences to

a card.


Page 247

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Drum Sounds

Edit Sound button

Bank buttons

Screen keys



Select

DrumsDrums

Sound

EditSound

BankSet


ROMA Card


Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

There are two methods to get in the Drum Edit mode:• Change sound mode command - This is the standard method to switch between the

Switch drum sound edit mode and the default sound edit mode. TheCommand is on the screen 05 in both edit mode.

• Sound Selection - A second method to switch between the two modes andherzuspringen is easy to select different sounds. The current sounddetermines the Edit Mode. You can reach the drum sound edit mode byYou select a drum sound ( banks 8 and 9, Screens 0 to 9) , and then the greatEdit Sound button.

• Press a narrow bank button (first digit of the number) and then a broaderScreen - button (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Wave Bank Filter-bank00 No. -Current Key / Key Range / Wave Name 40 filter cutoff / Vel. Level Control01 -wave class / Wave Name02 -Direction Env2 Bank03 -Clear Key Map In that bank, there are no parameters04 -Set default Map05 -Change Sound Mode Amp Bank

60 -gate time / release timePitch Bank 61 -Level Velocity Control / Fashion10 -Octave / Semitone / Fine Tune11 Keyboard On Pitch Tracking Output Bank

70 -Volume / Boost / PanEnv1 Bank 71 -Output bus / Velocity CurveIn that bank, there are no parameters

Effects BankLFO Bank Varies depending on the effect program.In that bank, there are no parameters

Store Sounds Bank90 -Press ENTER to Store sounds to acard.


Page 248

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Effects

WavePitchEnv1 LFO Env2 Amp Output SoundsFilter

LocateControlClickSong Seq Quantize

DrumsDrums

EditSound


ROMA Card


Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

Edit Sound buttonEdit Seq / Preset button

Bank buttons

Screen keys

EditSeq / Preset

To achieve the effect parameters in the Edit Sound Mode:• Press the Edit Sound button. The LED above it lights up.• Press the Effects button ( Bank 8 ), then a screen button (second digit of the

uA speed dial numbers) in order to achieve the following parameters.

In the sequences / presets mode you reach these parameters Seq Edit / Preset,Effects (Bank8) and the Screen - keys.

CONCERT REVERB PHASE SHIFTERHALL REVERB 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 MixROOM REVERB 81-phase rate / phase Depth80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 82 phase center / Feedback81-Decay Time / diffusion 83 stereo Cross - Feedback82 Detune Rate / Detune Depth 84 Phaser Level / Input Invert83-HF Damping / RF Bandwidth 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount84-Low Frequency Decay85 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount PHASER REVERB +

80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 MixWARM-CHAMBER 81-Decay Time / HF Damping80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 82-phase rate / phase Depth81-DecayTime / diffusion 83 phase center / Feedback82 Detune Rate / Detune Depth 84 Phaser Level / Input Invert83-HF Damping / RF Bandwidth 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount84 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount

ROTARY SPKR + REVB8-VOICE CHORUS 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping81-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth 82 Slow Speed / Fast Speed82 chorus Center / Feedback 83-rotor center / rotor Depth83 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount 84-Speed Mode / Mod Source

CHORUS + REVERB DIST + CHORUS + REVB80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix81-Decay Time / HF Damping 81-Decay Time / Dist Level82-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth 82-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth83 chorus Center / Feedback 83 chorus Center / Feedback84 Chorus Level 84 Chorus Level85 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount

Flanger + REVERB 1 CMPRSS + DIST + REVBFlanger + REVERB 2 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping81-Decay Time / HF Damping 82-Flange Rate / Compression82-Flange rate / Flange Depth 83-Distortion Level In / Out83-Flange Center / Feedback 84 reverb to Compression Feedback84-Flange Level / Input Invert 85-HiPass Cutoff / LoPass cutoff85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount 86 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount

Page 249

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Edit Track & System • MIDI

WavePitchEnv1LFO Env2AmpOutput SoundsFilter

LocateControlClickSong Seq Quantize

DrumsDrums


ROMA Card


Store

StoreSeqsMute

Internal Card B

TrackTracks

Trans-poseOutputBus

0

Effects

Effects

TrackCmdsCmdsCmds

5 91 8763 42

Timbre

Bank buttons

Screen keys

EditSeq / Preset

Seq / PresetSelect

TrackEdit

LayerLock

System • MIDI button

System • MIDI

ReplaceSound Track

MakeDefault preset

Record Stop Play

Continue

1

7 8

43

5

2

6

Edit Track button

In order to achieve the edit track mode parameters:• Press the small edit track - key (Speed Dial name: ET ). The LED above

the Edit Track button lights, together with the Seq Edit / Preset LED.• With the larger screen - keys then obtain the following parameters:

Edit track parametersET0 -Track Volume / PanET1 -Track output bus routingET2 -Track Key RangeET3 -Track TransposeET4 -Track MIDI Channel / Program NumberET5 -Track MIDI statusET6 -Track Pressure TypeET7 -Track Sustain Pedal EnableET8 -Track timbreET9 -Track Release

Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters byJust the Edit Track button repeatedly until the desired parameterappears.

To achieve the system • MIDI parameters:• Press the larger System • MIDI - button (shortcut designation SM ). The LED

above the button lights up.• Use the big screen buttons following parameters:

System • MIDI parametersSM0 -Master Tune / Global Bend RangeSM1 -Touch Curve / Pressure ThresholdSM2 -Foot Switch Left / Right FootswitchSM3 -Foot Pedal Mode / Voice mutingSM4 -Base MIDI Channel / Base Channel MIDI statusSM5 -Base Channel Pressure TypeSM6 -MIDI Fashion / External MIDI Controller NumberSM7 -MIDI Controller / Program Change System Exclusive SM8 / Song SelectSM9 -MIDI Track Name / MIDI loop

Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters bysimply the System • MIDI button repeatedly until the desired parameterappears.

Page 250

Ensoniq ks 32 user manual english sortof

Documents

Transcript of Ensoniq ks 32 user manual english sortof